Download SAA Software Manual

Transcript
Instruction Manual
SAA Software
Measurand Inc.
2111 Hanwell Rd.
Fredericton, NB, Canada
E3C 1M7
tel: 506-462-9119
fax: 506-462-9095
Email: [email protected]
http://www.measurandgeotechnical.com
This page is left intentionally blank
SAA Software
Notices
Measurand shall have no liability for incidental or consequential damages of any kind arising out of
the sale, installation, or use of its products. Please read this document and any notes and instructions
carefully before proceeding with installation and operation. The information herein is subject to
change without prior notification.
ShapeAccelArray (SAA) is covered by patents including: 6127672, 6563107, 7296363, WO 02/055958,
WO 98/41815, 5352039, 2427421 and others pending.
Measurand Software is copyrighted. Any unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
In addition to this manual, a prerequisite to installing and using SAA is to study the SAA Description &
Installation Manual and any other manuals covering hardware or software relevant to use of SAAs in
your particular installation. All manuals are available through our website
(http://www.measurandgeotechnical.com/software.html) or through SAASuite.
Revisions No: 1
December 2014
i
This page is left intentionally blank
ii
December 2014
SAA Software
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................ iii
List of Figures..................................................................................................................xii
1.
2.
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1
1.1
System Requirements....................................................................................................1
1.2
Installation....................................................................................................................2
1.3
Manual Overview ..........................................................................................................2
SAASuite ................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Main Application Tab ....................................................................................................3
Application Buttons ..........................................................................................................................3
User Manual Buttons ........................................................................................................................4
Get Software/”Calibration” files Button ...........................................................................................4
2.1.3.1
Communication Settings Button ..............................................................................................6
File Menu ..........................................................................................................................................6
Help Menu ........................................................................................................................................6
2.1.5.1
Manuals Menu Item .................................................................................................................7
2.1.5.2
Register Menu Item .................................................................................................................8
2.1.5.3
Get Software Menu Item .........................................................................................................8
2.1.5.4
About Menu Item.....................................................................................................................8
3.
2.2
SAACR_ Utilities Tab ......................................................................................................9
2.3
Legacy Applications Tab .............................................................................................. 10
SAACR_FileGenerator .............................................................................................. 11
3.1
SAACR_FileGenerator Tab ........................................................................................... 11
Open File Button .............................................................................................................................12
SAARecorder Folder Field ...............................................................................................................12
Project Title Field ............................................................................................................................12
Number of Preliminary Samples .....................................................................................................12
Reading Interval Field & Units Field ................................................................................................12
Logger Type Drop-Down List...........................................................................................................13
Sensor Fields ...................................................................................................................................13
3.1.7.1
SAA .........................................................................................................................................13
3.1.7.2
232(-5) Channel......................................................................................................................14
3.1.7.3
COM Port ...............................................................................................................................14
3.1.7.4
Serial Number ........................................................................................................................14
3.1.7.5
Averaging Level ......................................................................................................................14
Generate File Button ......................................................................................................................15
What to do with the File .................................................................................................................15
3.2
SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration Tab ............................................................................ 15
Raw Data Folder Field .....................................................................................................................16
Data Logger Name Field ..................................................................................................................16
Time Zone Off set Drop-Down List .................................................................................................16
Export Settings Button ....................................................................................................................16
Non-SAA Sensors / Virtual SAAs / Convergence SAAs ....................................................................17
3.2.5.1
Checkboxes ............................................................................................................................18
December 2014
iii
3.2.5.2
“Site” file Path Field .............................................................................................................. 18
3.2.5.3
Additional Configuration Button ........................................................................................... 18
Sensor Fields .................................................................................................................................. 19
3.2.6.1
SAA ........................................................................................................................................ 19
3.2.6.2
Orientation ............................................................................................................................ 19
3.2.6.3
Reference End ....................................................................................................................... 19
3.2.6.4
Azimuth ................................................................................................................................. 19
3.2.6.5
Segments Used...................................................................................................................... 19
3.2.6.6
Slaved Segments ................................................................................................................... 19
Generate Config File Button .......................................................................................................... 19
What to do with the File ................................................................................................................ 20
4.
LoggerNet ............................................................................................................... 21
4.1
Setting Up the CS Data Logger...................................................................................... 21
Setting up the Logger ..................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.1.1
Communication Setup........................................................................................................... 23
4.1.1.2
Data Logger Settings ............................................................................................................. 26
Creating a “Main Program” file ...................................................................................................... 27
Compiling SAA Program Files ......................................................................................................... 27
Uploading Program Files to the CR1000 ........................................................................................ 29
Data File Management .................................................................................................................. 32
4.2
Collecting Data from the CS Data Logger ...................................................................... 33
Manual Data Collection ................................................................................................................. 33
Automated Data Collection ........................................................................................................... 35
Manual Data Conversions .............................................................................................................. 36
Automated Data Conversions ........................................................................................................ 36
Saving Data in Overwrite File Mode .............................................................................................. 39
4.3
5.
Files Created by the Logger .......................................................................................... 40
SAACR_raw2data .................................................................................................... 42
5.1
Starting SAACR_raw2data ........................................................................................... 42
5.2
“Calibration” files ........................................................................................................ 43
5.3
Files and Subfolders .................................................................................................... 44
PROJECT_INFO.dat File .................................................................................................................. 45
SAA_DATA.dat Files ....................................................................................................................... 45
SERIAL_ERRORS.dat File ................................................................................................................. 46
DIAGNOSTIC Files ........................................................................................................................... 47
Non-SAA Files ................................................................................................................................. 47
Export Files..................................................................................................................................... 48
5.3.6.1
DIY Subfolder ........................................................................................................................ 48
5.3.6.2
Archive Subfolder .................................................................................................................. 49
5.4
Utilities ....................................................................................................................... 50
5.5
Getting Started ........................................................................................................... 50
Logger Raw Data File Window ....................................................................................................... 51
5.5.1.1
Selecting a Project - Reset ..................................................................................................... 51
5.5.1.2
Selecting Files - Reset ............................................................................................................ 52
“Calibration” files ........................................................................................................................... 54
Selecting Settings ........................................................................................................................... 54
iv
December 2014
SAA Software
5.5.3.1
Current Export Formats and Data Types ................................................................................57
5.5.3.2
DIY Format Definitions ...........................................................................................................58
Command-Line Operation ..............................................................................................................59
5.6
Reviewing the Files...................................................................................................... 60
Viewing the Data ............................................................................................................................62
5.7
Magnetometers .......................................................................................................... 62
Magnetometers in SAAs .................................................................................................................62
First Conversion Setup ....................................................................................................................62
5.8
“Site” Files .................................................................................................................. 68
Superset SAAs .................................................................................................................................68
Convergence SAAs ..........................................................................................................................69
5.9
Non-SAA Sensors......................................................................................................... 70
Piezometer (PZ) ..............................................................................................................................71
Earth Pressure Cells (EPCs) & Strain Gauges (SGs) .........................................................................79
“non_saa_coeffs.cal” File ...............................................................................................................80
6.
SAARecorder ........................................................................................................... 82
6.1
Connecting Hardware .................................................................................................. 82
Connect SAA ...................................................................................................................................83
Connecting using the SAAFPU ........................................................................................................83
Connecting using the SAA232 .........................................................................................................86
Connecting using the SAA232-5......................................................................................................89
Connecting using the SAAUSB Adapter ..........................................................................................91
Connection Completion ..................................................................................................................93
Other Startup Window Options ......................................................................................................94
Once SAARecorder has started .......................................................................................................95
6.2
Saving and Exporting Raw Data (File) ........................................................................... 97
File | Auto-save raw data file(s)......................................................................................................97
File | Quick save button..................................................................................................................99
File| Save raw data file .................................................................................................................100
File| Open raw data file ................................................................................................................101
File| Close raw data file ................................................................................................................102
File | Export raw data to ...............................................................................................................102
6.2.6.1
SAAView ...............................................................................................................................102
6.2.6.2
A text file ..............................................................................................................................104
6.2.6.3
An Atlas file ..........................................................................................................................108
6.2.6.4
Grout Anchor Data ...............................................................................................................108
File | Save text snapshot of SAA data ...........................................................................................115
File | Generate Scan Reports from Current Data .........................................................................118
File | Generate Scan Reports from Text Snapshot(s) ...................................................................121
File | Concatenate horizontal pose data ..................................................................................122
Grouping Multiple Raw Data (or Text) Files Together ..............................................................122
6.3
Communications ....................................................................................................... 123
Communications | Baud Rate .......................................................................................................123
Communications | Check available COM ports ............................................................................124
Communications | Search for serial SAAs ....................................................................................124
Communications | Serial port connections ..................................................................................127
Communications | Advanced | Network | Network connections ................................................128
Communications | Advanced | Network | Search for network SAAs ..........................................128
December 2014
v
6.4
SAA Setup ................................................................................................................. 129
SAA Setup | View Basic Settings .................................................................................................. 129
SAA Setup | Averaging / AIA Mode ............................................................................................. 129
SAA Setup | Reference ................................................................................................................ 130
SAA Setup | Mode ....................................................................................................................... 131
SAA Setup | Site Properties ......................................................................................................... 131
SAA Setup | Units ........................................................................................................................ 133
SAA Setup | Sampling Rate .......................................................................................................... 134
SAA Setup | Displacement and Tilt Alarms .................................................................................. 135
6.4.8.1
Displacement Alarms .......................................................................................................... 137
6.4.8.2
Vector Alarms...................................................................................................................... 138
6.4.8.3
Tilt Alarms ........................................................................................................................... 138
SAA Setup | Piezometer Options ................................................................................................. 139
SAA Setup | Advanced | Constrain SAA Endpoint ................................................................... 140
SAA Setup | Advanced | Turn on / off section of SAA ............................................................. 140
SAA Setup | Advanced | Straighten section of SAA ................................................................ 141
SAA Setup | Advanced | Enable / Disable magnetometer twist correction............................ 141
SAA Setup | Advanced | Orientation sensor option ............................................................... 142
SAA Setup | Advanced | Hardware Triggering ........................................................................ 142
SAA Setup | Advanced | Use long time stamps ...................................................................... 142
6.5
Data and Graphs ....................................................................................................... 143
Data and Graphs | Raw Data ....................................................................................................... 143
Data and Graphs | Numeric Data ................................................................................................ 143
Data and Graphs | Graph Data .................................................................................................... 144
Data and Graphs | View snapshot of SAA data ........................................................................... 146
Data and Graphs | Vertical Displacements Relative to Reference SAA Shape ............................ 147
Data and Graphs | View +X-mark Roll Angle ............................................................................... 149
Data and Graphs | Magnetometer data ...................................................................................... 151
Data and Graphs | Get vibration data ......................................................................................... 151
6.5.8.1
Acceleration vs. Time Graph ............................................................................................... 152
6.5.8.2
Acceleration vs. Frequency Graph ...................................................................................... 154
6.5.8.3
Save File .............................................................................................................................. 155
6.6
Viewing SAAs and SAA Data (Display Options) ........................................................... 156
Display Options | Number of Views ............................................................................................ 156
Display Options | SAA Thickness ................................................................................................. 156
Display Options | SAA Display Color ............................................................................................ 157
Display Options | Magnify Vertical Displacement ....................................................................... 158
Display Options | Zooming In and Out ........................................................................................ 158
6.6.5.1
Zoom In ............................................................................................................................... 158
6.6.5.2
Zoom Out ............................................................................................................................ 158
6.6.5.3
Zoom to Fit .......................................................................................................................... 159
Display Options | View Data Rate ................................................................................................ 159
Display Options | Reset view settings ......................................................................................... 159
Display Options | Advanced | Change frame rate ....................................................................... 159
Display Options | Advanced | Show Inclination Warning Text .................................................... 159
Mouse Feature | Panning the View ......................................................................................... 160
6.7
Diagnostics................................................................................................................ 160
Diagnostic Tests ........................................................................................................................... 160
6.7.1.1
Voltage / Current Check ...................................................................................................... 161
6.7.1.2
Total Acceleration Check..................................................................................................... 161
6.7.1.3
Sensor Noise Test ................................................................................................................ 162
vi
December 2014
SAA Software
6.7.1.4
6.7.1.5
6.7.1.6
6.8
Data Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................163
Communications Check........................................................................................................163
SAA Bend Angles ..................................................................................................................164
Calibrations............................................................................................................... 165
Calibrations | Roll calibration .......................................................................................................165
Calibrations | 2D shape alignment (mixed (convergence) mode only) ........................................166
Calibrations | Calibrate piezometer offset ...................................................................................167
Calibrations | Advanced | Horizontal Calibration ........................................................................167
6.8.4.1
Floor Survey Text File ...........................................................................................................168
Calibrations | Advanced | Vertical Calibration .............................................................................169
Calibrations | Advanced | Load previous vertical calibration ......................................................169
Calibrations | Advanced |Join SAAs together ..............................................................................169
6.9
Troubleshooting & Support (Help) ............................................................................. 169
Help | About SAARecorder ...........................................................................................................170
Help| Documentation ...................................................................................................................170
Help | Keyboard Shortcuts ...........................................................................................................170
Help | Tutorial Videos ...................................................................................................................170
Other ways of connecting SAAs ....................................................................................................170
7.
SAAView ............................................................................................................... 171
7.1
Running SAAView...................................................................................................... 171
SAARecorder Selection .................................................................................................................171
CR Logger Selection ......................................................................................................................171
DL1_Logger Selection ...................................................................................................................172
Server Selection ............................................................................................................................172
7.1.4.1
New Project button ..............................................................................................................172
7.1.4.2
Delete Name Button ............................................................................................................174
7.1.4.3
Open Saved Project Button ..................................................................................................174
7.1.4.4
Incremental Download Button ............................................................................................174
7.1.4.5
Download All Files Button ....................................................................................................174
7.1.4.6
Get Server Listing Button .....................................................................................................174
7.2
Main Window Overview ............................................................................................ 174
File Menu ......................................................................................................................................178
7.2.1.1
Export Data ..........................................................................................................................178
7.2.1.2
Save image ...........................................................................................................................178
7.2.1.3
Delete SAA Filter File............................................................................................................178
7.2.1.4
Delete Sensor Filter File .......................................................................................................178
7.2.1.5
Delete Alarm File..................................................................................................................178
7.2.1.6
Delete AutoCall File..............................................................................................................178
Settings Menu ...............................................................................................................................179
7.2.2.1
Metric / English ....................................................................................................................179
7.2.2.2
Edit Project Name ................................................................................................................179
7.2.2.3
Elevation Offsets ..................................................................................................................179
7.2.2.4
Auto Scale / Manual Scale ...................................................................................................180
7.2.2.5
Change SparseView Settings ................................................................................................180
FilterSensor Button .......................................................................................................................182
FilterSAA Button ...........................................................................................................................182
7.2.4.1
File Menu .............................................................................................................................183
7.2.4.2
Settings Menu ......................................................................................................................183
7.2.4.3
Left Graph ............................................................................................................................183
7.2.4.4
Right Graph – Right-Click Dashed Lines ...............................................................................183
December 2014
vii
7.2.4.5
Sliders .................................................................................................................................. 187
7.2.4.6
Other Options ..................................................................................................................... 188
AzimuthSAA Button ..................................................................................................................... 188
7.2.5.1
Left-Click Dashed Lines........................................................................................................ 188
7.2.5.2
Right-Click Dashed Lines ..................................................................................................... 188
7.2.5.3
Azi and Aza .......................................................................................................................... 189
Quick View Button ....................................................................................................................... 190
7.2.6.1
File Menu ............................................................................................................................ 190
7.2.6.2
Rotating Graphs .................................................................................................................. 190
7.2.6.3
X Button .............................................................................................................................. 190
7.2.6.4
Z Button............................................................................................................................... 191
7.2.6.5
Default Button..................................................................................................................... 191
7.2.6.6
Capture Button.................................................................................................................... 191
7.2.6.7
EI = 0 Radio Button .............................................................................................................. 191
7.2.6.8
Zoom Slider ......................................................................................................................... 191
AlarmSet Button .......................................................................................................................... 192
7.2.7.1
File Menu ............................................................................................................................ 192
7.2.7.2
Settings Menu ..................................................................................................................... 192
7.2.7.3
Alarm Level Drop-Down List................................................................................................ 192
7.2.7.4
Parameters Button .............................................................................................................. 193
7.2.7.5
On / Off Button ................................................................................................................... 196
7.2.7.6
All On / Off Button .............................................................................................................. 196
7.2.7.7
‘Copy 2 All’ Button .............................................................................................................. 196
7.2.7.8
Copy From Button ............................................................................................................... 196
7.2.7.9
Save Button ......................................................................................................................... 196
View Button ................................................................................................................................. 196
7.3
Unfiltered / Filtered Data View Windows ................................................................... 197
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Settings Menu .............................................................................................................................. 199
7.3.2.1
Edit Site Photo Size ............................................................................................................. 200
7.3.2.2
Edit Message Box ................................................................................................................ 200
7.3.2.3
Change SparseView Settings ............................................................................................... 200
7.3.2.4
AutoCall ............................................................................................................................... 200
7.3.2.5
View menu .......................................................................................................................... 201
GraphAll(+Exports) ....................................................................................................................... 202
7.3.3.1
File Menu ............................................................................................................................ 202
7.3.3.2
Settings Menu ..................................................................................................................... 204
7.3.3.3
View Menu .......................................................................................................................... 205
7.3.3.4
Dashed Lines ....................................................................................................................... 205
7.3.3.5
Type Radio Buttons ............................................................................................................. 206
7.3.3.6
From Drop-Down Menu ...................................................................................................... 206
7.3.3.7
Skip Drop-Down Menu ........................................................................................................ 206
7.3.3.8
To Drop-Down Menu .......................................................................................................... 206
7.3.3.9
Single Radio Button ............................................................................................................. 206
7.3.3.10 Hilite Sliders ........................................................................................................................ 207
7.3.3.11 Zoom Sliders ........................................................................................................................ 207
7.3.3.12 Total Display ........................................................................................................................ 208
X Graph & Y Graph ....................................................................................................................... 208
7.3.4.1
Relative to 1st Vertex ........................................................................................................... 209
7.3.4.2
Relative to Selected Vertex ................................................................................................. 209
7.3.4.3
Place User Line .................................................................................................................... 209
7.3.4.4
Delete All User Lines ........................................................................................................... 209
viii
December 2014
SAA Software
7.3.4.5
Select Vertex 1 / Vertex 2 ....................................................................................................210
Variable T Graph ...........................................................................................................................211
7.3.5.1
Select Time Subset ...............................................................................................................211
7.3.5.2
Selected Times Only .............................................................................................................212
7.3.5.3
Relative to 1st Selected Time ................................................................................................212
7.3.5.4
Restore All Times .................................................................................................................212
A. SAACR Utilties ....................................................................................................... 213
A.1
A.1.1
A.1.2
A.2
A.2.1
A.2.2
A.3
A.3.1
A.3.2
A.4
A.4.1
A.4.2
B.
C.
SAACR_raw2raw_concat ........................................................................................... 213
Preceding / Alternate Steps ..........................................................................................................213
The process ...................................................................................................................................213
SAACR_cart2cart ....................................................................................................... 218
Preceding / Alternate Steps ..........................................................................................................218
The Process ...................................................................................................................................218
SAACR_cart2cart_matchup ........................................................................................ 220
Preceding / Alternate Steps ..........................................................................................................220
The Process ...................................................................................................................................221
SAACR_cart2manycart ............................................................................................... 226
Preceding / Alternate Steps ..........................................................................................................226
The Process ...................................................................................................................................227
SAACR_DataChecker ............................................................................................. 230
B.1
Opening Raw Data Files ............................................................................................. 230
B.2
Viewing Individual Raw Data Samples ........................................................................ 232
B.3
Filtering Data Files ..................................................................................................... 233
B.4
Saving Data Files ....................................................................................................... 234
Using Network Data Concentrators ....................................................................... 235
C.1
Configuring Network Addresses ................................................................................. 235
C.2
Connecting Hardware ................................................................................................ 237
C.2.1
C.2.2
C.3
C.3.1
Recommended Hardware Connection Procedure ........................................................................237
Recommended Hardware Shutdown Procedure ..........................................................................238
Testing Hardware Connections .................................................................................. 238
Network Testing ...........................................................................................................................238
D. Maximum Achievable Clock and Data Rates .......................................................... 240
E.
D.1
Two SAAs in 3-D Mode .............................................................................................. 240
D.2
Two SAAs in 2-D Mode .............................................................................................. 240
D.3
Four SAAs in 3-D Mode .............................................................................................. 240
D.4
Four SAAs in 2-D Mode .............................................................................................. 241
D.5
Six SAAs in 3-D Mode ................................................................................................ 241
D.6
Six SAAs in 2-D Mode ................................................................................................ 241
Using a PC and SAARecorder for Data Logging....................................................... 242
December 2014
ix
F.
E.1
Choosing an Averaging Setting ................................................................................... 243
E.2
Setting up a File and Folder System for Storing Raw Data ........................................... 243
E.3
Recording Raw Data .................................................................................................. 243
Connecting using the SAAR Interface Box ............................................................... 245
G. Integrating Other Sensors Into the Main CS Logger Program (Advanced) ................ 249
H. Legacy Formats (SAACR_raw2data) ....................................................................... 262
H.1
Legacy Format Definitions: ........................................................................................ 262
H.2
Reviewing the Files [Section 5.6]................................................................................ 262
H.2.1
H.2.2
H.2.3
I.
Atlas (Legacy) ............................................................................................................................... 263
Vista Data Vision (Legacy) ............................................................................................................ 264
Tempc (Legacy) ............................................................................................................................ 265
Finding Azimuth..................................................................................................... 266
I.1
SAA X-mark Protractor .............................................................................................. 266
I.2
SAA Reference Segment Alignment............................................................................ 267
I.2.1
I.2.2
J.
X-marking Visible ......................................................................................................................... 267
X-marking Not Visible .................................................................................................................. 268
Troubleshooting FAQs............................................................................................ 269
J.1
Adding / Removing SAAs to a Data Logger: ................................................................ 269
J.2
Adding an SAA to a Data Logger with Other Sensors: .................................................. 269
J.3
How to Collect & Convert Data Logger Data Automatically: ........................................ 269
J.4
Setting Alarms:.......................................................................................................... 269
J.5
SAACR_raw2data disappears: .................................................................................... 270
J.6
Combining Data Files From Different Data Loggers: .................................................... 270
J.7
Issues Installing SAASuite and SAACR Applications: .................................................... 270
J.8
Finding X & Y Directions with Magnetometers and No Azimuth Correction: ................ 270
J.9
Site File Issue: ........................................................................................................... 270
J.10
Quick Data Logger Verification:.................................................................................. 270
J.11
Updated Data Logger OS to Version 26:...................................................................... 271
J.12
Update Data Logger, Not Getting Data: ...................................................................... 271
J.13
COM Port Conflict: .................................................................................................... 272
J.14
Setting Azimuth:........................................................................................................ 272
J.15
Using Data From Damaged SAAs: ............................................................................... 272
J.16
Checking Magnetometers: ......................................................................................... 272
J.16.1
J.16.2
x
Checking magnetometer data collected with SAARecorder ................................................... 272
Checking magnetometer data collected using SAACR_raw2data ........................................... 273
December 2014
SAA Software
K.
J.17
Checking Data Logger Data: ....................................................................................... 273
J.18
SAAView Showing One Frame:................................................................................... 273
J.19
Ignoring Segments:.................................................................................................... 274
Support (Help) ....................................................................................................... 275
K.1
Online Documents ..................................................................................................... 275
K.2
Online Tutorial Videos ............................................................................................... 275
K.3
Online Software Downloads ...................................................................................... 275
December 2014
xi
List of Figures
Figure 1.1: ShapeAccelArray (SAA) on a reel. ........................................................................................................ 1
Figure 1.2: Campbell Scientific CS Data Loggers: CR1000, CR800 & CR3000. ........................................................ 1
Figure 2.1: ‘Main Application’ tab of SAASuite with labeling. ............................................................................... 3
Figure 2.2: ‘Get Software / “Calibration” files’ window. ........................................................................................ 4
Figure 2.3: ‘Download’ buttons and application / utility status. ........................................................................... 5
Figure 2.4: The ‘Communications Settings’ window. ............................................................................................. 6
Figure 2.5: The drop-down list for any ‘Instruction Manual’ available from SAASuite. ......................................... 7
Figure 2.6: The website page that opens when 'Register' is selected from the ‘Help’ menu. ................................ 8
Figure 2.7: The ‘About’ window for SAASuite. ....................................................................................................... 8
Figure 2.8: The ‘SAACR_ Utilities’ tab window. ...................................................................................................... 9
Figure 2.9: The ‘Legacy Applications’ tab window. .............................................................................................. 10
Figure 3.1: The ‘SAACRFileGenerator’ tab window. ............................................................................................. 12
Figure 3.2: Sensor Fields. ..................................................................................................................................... 13
Figure 3.3: ‘SAA’ checkbox. .................................................................................................................................. 13
Figure 3.4: ‘SAA232 or SAA232-5 Channel’ selection. .......................................................................................... 14
Figure 3.5: ‘COM Port’ dropdown. ....................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 3.6: ‘Serial Number’ field. ......................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 3.7: ‘Averaging’ field. ................................................................................................................................ 14
Figure 3.8: Saving a CS Data Logger program created using the SAACR_FileGenerator utility. .......................... 15
Figure 3.9: The ‘SAACRRaw2DataConfiguration’ tab window. ............................................................................ 16
Figure 3.10: ‘DIY Export Settings’ window. .......................................................................................................... 17
Figure 3.11: The ‘Additional Configuration’ window. .......................................................................................... 18
Figure 3.12: Sensor Fields. ................................................................................................................................... 19
Figure 3.13: Saving a conversion preference file using the ‘SAACR_FileGenerator’ utility. ................................. 20
Figure 4.1: LoggerNet ‘Main’ menu. .................................................................................................................... 21
Figure 4.2: LoggerNet ‘Program’ menu. .............................................................................................................. 22
Figure 4.3: ‘Setup’ window for LoggerNet. .......................................................................................................... 22
Figure 4.4: ‘EZSetup Wizard’ introduction window.............................................................................................. 23
Figure 4.5: Data Logger types and name. ............................................................................................................ 23
Figure 4.6: ‘Communication Setup’ connection type. .......................................................................................... 24
Figure 4.7: ‘COM Port Selection’ window. ........................................................................................................... 25
Figure 4.8: ‘Data Logger Settings’ window. ......................................................................................................... 25
Figure 4.9: ‘Data Logger Security’ window. ......................................................................................................... 26
Figure 4.10: ‘Communication Setup Summary’ window. ..................................................................................... 26
Figure 4.11: A completed first run through of the Setup. .................................................................................... 27
Figure 4.12: Saving and Compiling the SAA logger program. .............................................................................. 28
Figure 4.13: After Compilation in the CRBasic program. ..................................................................................... 29
Figure 4.14: The files after compiling, "*.tdf" file is created................................................................................ 29
Figure 4.15: ‘Selecting File Control’ in the LoggerNet ‘Connect’ utility. ............................................................... 30
Figure 4.16: ‘File Control’ window, where files are uploaded to the data logger. ............................................... 30
Figure 4.17: ‘Select Run Options’ should only be selected for the “Main Program”. ........................................... 31
Figure 4.18: Compiling after “Main Program” was uploaded. ............................................................................ 31
Figure 4.19: ‘File Control’ window after the “Main Program” has been compiled, it is now running. ................ 32
Figure 4.20: Specifying the destination of data files using the LoggerNet ‘Setup’ utility. ................................... 32
Figure 4.21: Disabling scheduled data collection................................................................................................. 34
Figure 4.22: Collecting data using the LoggerNet ‘Connect’ utility. .................................................................... 35
Figure 4.23: Enabling scheduled data collection. ................................................................................................ 36
Figure 4.24: Creating a task using the LoggerNet 'Task Master' utility. .............................................................. 37
Figure 4.25: Configuring a task using the LoggerNet 'Task Master' utility. ......................................................... 38
Figure 4.26: Viewing the status of scheduled tasks in ‘Task Master’ utility. ....................................................... 39
xii
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 4.27: Switching the ‘Data File Output’ option in the LoggerNet 'Setup' utility to 'Overwrite Existing File'.
..............................................................................................................................................................................40
Figure 5.1: Campbell Scientific Data Logger CR1000, CR800 & CR3000. ..............................................................42
Figure 5.2: SAACR_raw2data initial window. .......................................................................................................43
Figure 5.3: An example of an “XX_PROJECT_INFO.dat” file that contains two SAAs. ..........................................45
Figure 5.4: An example of an “XX_SAAn_DATA.dat” file. .....................................................................................45
Figure 5.5: An example of an “XX_SERIAL_ERRORS.dat” file. ...............................................................................47
Figure 5.6: The example" XX_SERIAL_ERRORS.dat" file copied into Excel. ...........................................................47
Figure 5.7: Common ‘DIY’ folder contents. ...........................................................................................................48
Figure 5.8: A view of the “saa_export_info.txt” file in the ‘DIY’ folder. ................................................................49
Figure 5.9: ‘Startup’ window with three options. .................................................................................................51
Figure 5.10: ‘Logger Raw Data File’ window. .......................................................................................................51
Figure 5.11: First time use ‘New Project’, only one select file window will open at a time. .................................52
Figure 5.12: The example folder that can be found in ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\’. .......................53
Figure 5.13: This is what the ‘Example’ project folder looks like, the “Errors” file will be ignored. ......................53
Figure 5.14: The ‘File Selection’ window displaying the files from the ‘Example’ folder. .....................................53
Figure 5.15: The ‘Settings’ window. ......................................................................................................................54
Figure 5.16: ‘Editing Slaved Segments’ for SAA with Serial Number 45821. ........................................................56
Figure 5.17: ‘Export Format’ window. ..................................................................................................................57
Figure 5.18: ‘Export format’ window for ‘Legacy’ formats. ..................................................................................59
Figure 5.19: SAACR_raw2data ‘Progress’ window. ..............................................................................................59
Figure 5.20: A view of the "saacr_raw2data_logfile.txt" which is a record of the ‘Progress’ window, see Figure
5.19 .......................................................................................................................................................................61
Figure 5.21: Most common files left by raw2data in the ‘Project’ folder. ............................................................61
Figure 5.22: A typical DIY data file, ‘SAAF_45821_60_500.dat’, copied into Excel. .............................................62
Figure 5.23: This “test” project includes one SAA two with magnetometers. ......................................................63
Figure 5.24: The ‘Settings’ window with the ‘Advanced (mag)’ button................................................................63
Figure 5.25: The notice appears on the first run through SAACR_raw2data when a mag is present. ..................63
Figure 5.26: The ‘magdata’ subfolder automatically created in the ‘Project’ folder. ...........................................64
Figure 5.27: The “magdata.mat” file to be saved in the ‘magdata’ subfolder. ....................................................64
Figure 5.28: The ‘Choose Mode’ window that appears. .......................................................................................64
Figure 5.29: The ‘Initial’ window of the ‘Magtool’. ..............................................................................................65
Figure 5.30: The menu that appears upon right-clicking the mouse on the dashed line. .....................................66
Figure 5.31: The ‘Magtool’ with the ‘tot’ button selected. ...................................................................................66
Figure 5.32: The menu available by right-clicking the mouse over a mag line while in ‘tot’ mode. .....................66
Figure 5.33: A notice announcing that a “roll_calibration.txt” file has been created and saved. ........................67
Figure 5.34: A reminder to run SAACR_raw2data over again to apply the magnetometer corrections. The next
time that SAACR_raw2data is run, the user must click the ‘RESET’ button on startup. Thereafter, when they are
converting additional data, they can click the ‘OK’ button to convert any new data. .........................................68
Figure 5.35: “Site” file for a SuperSet SAA. ...........................................................................................................69
Figure 5.36: “Site” file for a Convergence SAA. ....................................................................................................70
Figure 5.37: PZ1_vw sensor mounted to 27 mm ID PVC conduit (SAA inside). The VW piezometer (made by
Geokon) is on the left and the Measurand microprocessor-based interface is on the right.................................72
Figure 5.38: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes 5 PZ3 sensors. ..................................................................73
Figure 5.39: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes 7 PZ1_vw sensors. ............................................................74
Figure 5.40: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes 7 PZ1_a sensors. ..............................................................75
Figure 5.41: The “piezo_info” file for PZ1_a sensors from Figure 5.40. ................................................................76
Figure 5.42: Data table for one of the ports handling three PZ1_a sensors. ........................................................76
Figure 5.43: ‘Progress’ window showing the PZ1_a serial numbers reported by SAACR_raw2data during
conversion. They match those of the “piezo_info.dat” file. ..................................................................................77
Figure 5.44: PZ1_a data appears in “pz1_data.txt” in the ‘Project’ folder. ..........................................................77
Figure 5.45: Example of a “Site” file with PZ1_a sensors being used with SAAs and “piezo_data.dat” files in
SAACR_raw2data..................................................................................................................................................78
December 2014
xiii
Figure 5.46: ‘Project’ folder for Figure 5.45. ........................................................................................................ 78
Figure 5.47: Example of a CS Data Logger data table from PZ3 sensors. ............................................................ 79
Figure 5.48: Excerpt from a “’Site” file which includes EPC3 sensors .................................................................. 80
Figure 5.49: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes SG3 sensors. .................................................................... 80
Figure 5.50: A “non_saa_coeffs.cal” file for an EPC3 sensor (seen in Figure 5.48). ............................................. 81
Figure 5.51: A “non_saa_coeffs.cal” file for an SG3 sensor (seen in Figure 5.49). .............................................. 81
Figure 6.1: The ‘Configuration’ buttons on the left of the ‘Connect SAA’ window. ............................................. 82
Figure 6.2: The ‘Startup’ window. This window appears once SAARecorder has been initialized. ...................... 83
Figure 6.3: SAA Field Power Unit (SAAFPU) in center. ......................................................................................... 83
Figure 6.4: Model 003 SAA Field Power Unit Interface. (A) 4-pin circular connector wiring design, N.B. The
physical connector is external (not shown here) located on the left side of the SAAFPU, (B) 5-pin terminal block,
(C) Battery charge level meter, (D) Auxiliary 4-pin terminal block. ..................................................................... 84
Figure 6.5: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAAFPU selected. ......................................................... 86
Figure 6.6: SAA232. The 4-pin green connector connects to the RS232 port of the PC. The 5-pin green connector
connects to the SAA. ............................................................................................................................................ 87
Figure 6.7: SAA232-USB cable. This is a USB to serial converter for use with SAA232. The red wire shown above
should be connected to a +12 volt supply, and the black wire should be connected to GND of the same supply.
............................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Figure 6.8: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAA232 selected. ......................................................... 89
Figure 6.9: SAA232-5. 4-pin green connector connects to RS232 port of a PC. 5-pin green connectors connect up
to five SAAs. ......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Figure 6.10: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAA232-5 selected. .................................................... 91
Figure 6.11: SAAUSB adapter model SAAUSB-002............................................................................................... 91
Figure 6.12: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAAUSB selected. ....................................................... 92
Figure 6.13: ‘Search’ tab while connecting SAA. .................................................................................................. 93
Figure 6.14: ‘Device Connection’ window. ........................................................................................................... 93
Figure 6.15: ‘Add Device’ window........................................................................................................................ 94
Figure 6.16: ‘Device Test’ window. ...................................................................................................................... 94
Figure 6.17: ‘Operational Mode’ window. ........................................................................................................... 95
Figure 6.18: Application view of SAARecorder showing a single SAA in 3D mode. This view shows three
orthographic views of the SAA, plus a fourth perspective view (lower-right corner). ......................................... 96
Figure 6.19: ‘Basic Settings’ window. .................................................................................................................. 97
Figure 6.20: View of the ‘File’ drop down menu. ................................................................................................. 97
Figure 6.21: ‘Auto-Save Raw Data’ window. ....................................................................................................... 98
Figure 6.22: The green ‘Record Data’ button that appears when ‘File | Quick Save’ is selected. ....................... 99
Figure 6.23: The ‘Choose Raw Data Filename’ window that appears once recording is complete. .................. 100
Figure 6.24: ‘Playback / Recording’ window for recording raw shape array (.rsa) data. .................................. 101
Figure 6.25: ‘Playback / Recording’ window for playback of raw data files. Controls within this window allow
one to move backwards or forwards through the file and control the playback speed. ................................... 101
Figure 6.26: ‘Save Subset of Raw Data File’ window. ........................................................................................ 102
Figure 6.27: ‘Time vs. Samples’ graph for exporting to SAAView. ..................................................................... 103
Figure 6.28: ‘SAA Conversion Parameters’ window. .......................................................................................... 103
Figure 6.29: ‘Export to Text Data’ window. ....................................................................................................... 105
Figure 6.30: ‘Select Data to Export to Text’ window. ......................................................................................... 106
Figure 6.31: ‘Sampling and Output Options’ window. ....................................................................................... 107
Figure 6.32: A view of the created text file in Notepad. .................................................................................... 107
Figure 6.33: ‘Choose Atlas File Format’ window. ............................................................................................... 108
Figure 6.34: ‘Export Grout Anchor Data’ window. ............................................................................................. 109
Figure 6.35: ‘Anchor View’ application opened while saving Anchor Grout Data. ............................................ 110
Figure 6.36: ‘Joint File Header + Notes’ window. ............................................................................................... 111
Figure 6.37: ‘User Attribution’ window.............................................................................................................. 111
Figure 6.38: ‘Set Manual Scaling’ window. ........................................................................................................ 112
Figure 6.39: ‘Set Polyfit Order’ window. ............................................................................................................ 112
xiv
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.40: ‘Set Angle of Design Path’ window. ................................................................................................113
Figure 6.41: ‘Set Line Colors’ window. ................................................................................................................113
Figure 6.42: ‘Select Additional Normalization’ window......................................................................................114
Figure 6.43: The display view after clicking the ‘(X-Z)/(S-Z)’ button. ..................................................................115
Figure 6.44: Choose between live data and saved raw data. .............................................................................116
Figure 6.45: Options for saving text snapshot files. It is possible to specify a base reference file, in order to view
displacement data relative to this reference file. ...............................................................................................116
Figure 6.46: The ‘XYZ Summary’ window. ..........................................................................................................117
Figure 6.47: ‘Graph Options’ for either XZ or YZ graph. .....................................................................................118
Figure 6.48: Scan Report Output window. ..........................................................................................................119
Figure 6.49: SAAScanReport application. ...........................................................................................................119
Figure 6.50: First page of Scan Report showing plain view of SAA Shape with fixed deviation limit circle. .......120
Figure 6.51: Second page of Scan Report showing section view of SAA shape (in XZ and YZ sections) with fixed
deviation limits. ..................................................................................................................................................121
Figure 6.52: ‘Concatenate Horizontal Pose Data’ window. ................................................................................122
Figure 6.53: SAA_Concat.exe utility is used for concatenating multiple raw data files (or multiple “Text” files)
together into one big long file. In the window above, five raw data files have been selected for concatenation.
............................................................................................................................................................................123
Figure 6.54: View of the ‘Communications’ drop down menu. ...........................................................................123
Figure 6.55: ‘Select Baud Rate’ window. ............................................................................................................124
Figure 6.56: List of available COM Ports. ............................................................................................................124
Figure 6.57: ‘Operational Mode’ window where 2-D or 3-D view is chosen. ......................................................124
Figure 6.58: ShapeAccelArray ‘Startup’ window where a file, configuration or a connections needs to be chosen.
............................................................................................................................................................................125
Figure 6.59: ‘Choose Serial Port’ window where a serial port must be chosen to connect to. ...........................126
Figure 6.60: ‘SAA Serial Numbers to Search’ window. ........................................................................................126
Figure 6.61: ‘Troubleshooting’ window. .............................................................................................................127
Figure 6.62: ‘SAA Serial Ports’ window. ..............................................................................................................128
Figure 6.63: ‘Network Connections’ window. .....................................................................................................128
Figure 6.64: View of the’ SAA Setup’ drop down menu. .....................................................................................129
Figure 6.65: ‘Averaging’ window. .......................................................................................................................130
Figure 6.66: Changing the SAA reference in the ‘SAASetup’ menu. ....................................................................130
Figure 6.67: Changing the Mode of SAARecorder in the ‘SAASetup’ menu. .......................................................131
Figure 6.68: ‘Site Properties’ window. ................................................................................................................132
Figure 6.69: ‘Azimuth Determination’ window. ..................................................................................................133
Figure 6.70: ‘Choose Units’ window. ..................................................................................................................134
Figure 6.71: ‘Enter New Sampling Frequency’ window used for setting the sampling frequency for all connected
SAAs. ...................................................................................................................................................................134
Figure 6.72: Choose one or all available SAAs. ...................................................................................................135
Figure 6.73: ‘Email Settings’ for Displacement and Tilt Alarms. .........................................................................136
Figure 6.74: ‘Set Displacement and Tilt Alarms’ window with parameters for controlling whether or not to use
displacement and / or tilt alarms, and what the limits for those alarms should be. ..........................................137
Figure 6.75: SAARecorder indicating a displacement alarm condition. In this case, the endpoints of all three
SAAs have moved beyond the alarm radius limit. ..............................................................................................138
Figure 6.76: Screen shot showing how SAARecorder indicates a tilt alarm condition. .......................................139
Figure 6.77: ‘Piezo output’ window for controlling the output from Measurand’s piezometer sensors. ...........140
Figure 6.78: ‘Constrain Endpoint Position of SAA’ window used for specifying the endpoint height of an SAA in
2-D mode. Useful for situations in which both ends of the SAA are constrained. ..............................................140
Figure 6.79: Window for selecting which SAA segments to turn on or off. ........................................................141
Figure 6.80: ‘Straighten SAA Selections’ window for selecting which SAA segments to make “straight”. .........141
Figure 6.81: ‘Hardware Triggering’ window. ......................................................................................................142
Figure 6.82: View of the ‘Data and Graphs’ drop down menu. ..........................................................................143
Figure 6.83: Raw data for an SAA subsection (i.e. octet)....................................................................................143
December 2014
xv
Figure 6.84: Numeric data for an SAA. .............................................................................................................. 144
Figure 6.85: Window prompting user to enter what data they would like to graph. ........................................ 144
Figure 6.86: Example graph for X-axis position of joints 1, 2, 3, and 4 of an SAA. ............................................ 145
Figure 6.87: ‘Graph Options’ window for ‘File | Graph Data’. ........................................................................... 146
Figure 6.88: ‘Real-Time Alarm Limits’ window for the current graph. ............................................................... 146
Figure 6.89: Snapshot view of SAA data. ........................................................................................................... 147
Figure 6.90: X-axis Barchart of relative displacements for an SAA. Displacements are relative to a previously
saved text snapshot file (saved with the ‘File | Save text snapshot of SAA data’ menu item). ......................... 148
Figure 6.91: Y-axis Barchart of relative displacements. ..................................................................................... 148
Figure 6.92: ‘Graph Displacement Options’ window. ........................................................................................ 149
Figure 6.93: The prompt window for selecting a particular SAA segment for which to display the roll angle of
the X-mark. ........................................................................................................................................................ 150
Figure 6.94: Roll angle graphic colored RED indicating that the X-mark of the selected segment is more than +/5.0 degrees from zero. ....................................................................................................................................... 150
Figure 6.95: ‘Magnetometer Data’. ................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 6.96: Select what type of vibration data and which part(s) of the SAA to view for vibration monitoring.
........................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Figure 6.97: ‘Choose Accelerometer View Options’. .......................................................................................... 153
Figure 6.98: ‘Vibration vs. Time Graph’ window. ............................................................................................... 153
Figure 6.99: ‘Choose Vibration Data’ window with FFT sample size text box.................................................... 154
Figure 6.100: Graph of acceleration vs. frequency for the SAA joint closest to the near end of the SAA. ......... 154
Figure 6.101: ‘Acceleration vs. Frequency Graph’ with Max Vibrations ON. ..................................................... 155
Figure 6.102: Window prompting user to select a type of vibration output file. ............................................... 155
Figure 6.103: View of the ‘Display Options’ drop down menu. .......................................................................... 156
Figure 6.104: ‘Number of Views’ on screen selection. ....................................................................................... 156
Figure 6.105: ‘Set SAA Thickness’ window. ........................................................................................................ 157
Figure 6.106: Window to select a color for the entire SAA or just subarrays (Octets). ...................................... 157
Figure 6.107: Color options for SAAs or Subarrays. ........................................................................................... 158
Figure 6.108: ‘Magnify Vertical Displacement’ window. ................................................................................... 158
Figure 6.109: View of data rates for each of the SAAs. ..................................................................................... 159
Figure 6.110: Found in menu 'Display Options | Advanced'. ............................................................................. 159
Figure 6.111: When the inclination warnings are on, they appear in Yellow text. ............................................ 160
Figure 6.112: View of the ‘Diagnostics’ drop down menu. ................................................................................ 160
Figure 6.113: ‘Diagnostic Tests’ Window. .......................................................................................................... 160
Figure 6.114: ‘Voltage / Current Check’. ............................................................................................................ 161
Figure 6.115: ‘Total Acceleration Check’. .......................................................................................................... 162
Figure 6.116: ‘Sensor Noise Test’. ...................................................................................................................... 162
Figure 6.117: ‘Data Diagnostics’. ....................................................................................................................... 163
Figure 6.118: ‘Communications Check’. ............................................................................................................. 164
Figure 6.119: SAA bend angles expressed as a radius of curvature (in m or ft) at each joint. ........................... 164
Figure 6.120: View of the Calibrations drop down menu. ................................................................................. 165
Figure 6.121: ‘SAA Roll Calibration’ window. Bar graphs are used to depict the roll offset error at each of the
SAA's joints. ....................................................................................................................................................... 165
Figure 6.122: ‘Near End Roll Angle’. .................................................................................................................. 166
Figure 6.123: Window used for aligning initial 2-D shape. ................................................................................ 167
Figure 6.124: Window used for performing a horizontal calibration on an SAA. .............................................. 168
Figure 6.125: Window to select calibration. ...................................................................................................... 169
Figure 6.126: View of the ‘Help’ drop down menu. ........................................................................................... 169
Figure 6.127: ‘About SAARecorder’ window. ..................................................................................................... 170
Figure 6.128: ‘Keyboard Shortcuts’. ................................................................................................................... 170
Figure 7.1: ‘Initial’ SAAView window. ................................................................................................................ 171
Figure 7.2: The window for retrieving files from the Measurand Server. .......................................................... 172
Figure 7.3: ‘New Project’ button clicked, Username and Password required. ................................................... 172
xvi
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.4: 'Submit' button clicked, project name appears. ...............................................................................173
Figure 7.5: The file "project" has been moved over to the left window, though the data is not yet downloaded.
............................................................................................................................................................................173
Figure 7.6: The message box that appears when there is no new data to download. .......................................174
Figure 7.7: The warning that appears when the data is from a Measurand's Legacy DL1 Logger.....................174
Figure 7.8: The ‘Main’ SAAView window of a vertical SAA (Project: large_shear). ............................................175
Figure 7.9: The ‘Main’ SAAView window of a horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ......................................175
Figure 7.10: The ‘Main’ SAAView window when a non-SAA has been selected (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Note: the variations are due to tidal water height, not unstable data...............................................................177
Figure 7.11: The ‘File’ menu in the ‘Main’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). Note: the variations are due
to tidal water height resulting in actual deformation, and do not represent unstable data. ............................178
Figure 7.12: The’ Settings’ menu in the ‘Main’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ....................................179
Figure 7.13: The window to change a project’s name. .......................................................................................179
Figure 7.14: The ‘Select Elevations’ window. ......................................................................................................180
Figure 7.15: The ‘Manual Scale’ window. ...........................................................................................................180
Figure 7.16: ‘SparseView Settings’ window. .......................................................................................................181
Figure 7.17: ‘Filter Sensor’ window, note the scale is in days and kPa (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). .............182
Figure 7.18: The ‘Filter Settings’ window for vertical SAA (Project: large_shear). .............................................182
Figure 7.19: The ‘Filter Settings’ window for a horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ....................................183
Figure 7.20: Right Click menu (Project: large_shear). ........................................................................................184
Figure 7.21: Two points selected for viewing, and the legend is movable (Project: large_shear). .....................185
Figure 7.22: Three points selected for viewing in single mode (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ....................................185
Figure 7.23: The first section was deleted but can still be seen in grey in both graphs (Project: large_shear). .186
Figure 7.24: The first section was deleted but can still be seen in grey in both graphs (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
............................................................................................................................................................................186
Figure 7.25: ‘No Skip, No Average’ (Project: large_shear). ................................................................................187
Figure 7.26: ‘No average, no Skip’ (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ...............................................................................187
Figure 7.27: The 'AzimuthSAA Settings’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ..............................................188
Figure 7.28: Max Deformation option is selected (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). .............................................189
Figure 7.29: Changing the Aza (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ..........................................................................189
Figure 7.30: ‘QuickView’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ......................................................................190
Figure 7.31: Results of 'Capture' button in 'QuickView' (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ....................................191
Figure 7.32: The ‘Main Alarm Settings’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ...............................................192
Figure 7.33: Green ‘SAA Params’ button for Vertical SAA (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ................................193
Figure 7.34: Green ‘SAA Params’ button for Horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc). .......................................193
Figure 7.35: Yellow ‘Sensor Parameters’ button showing Pzs (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ..........................194
Figure 7.36: Yellow ‘Sensor Parameters’ button showing EPCs (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ...................................194
Figure 7.37: ‘Actions Settings’ Window. .............................................................................................................196
Figure 7.38: A detailed list of alarms. .................................................................................................................197
Figure 7.39: ‘Unfiltered’ data view of a Vertical SAA (Project: large_shear). .....................................................197
Figure 7.40: ‘Filtered’ data view of a Vertical SAA with azimuth adjusted (Project: large_shear). ....................198
Figure 7.41: ‘Unfiltered’ data view of a Horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc)................................................198
Figure 7.42: ‘Filtered’ data view for a Horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc). .................................................199
Figure 7.43: ‘Filtered View’ window with labels for graphs. ...............................................................................199
Figure 7.44: ‘Edit Size of Photo’ window. ...........................................................................................................200
Figure 7.45: ‘Auto Call Setup’ window. ...............................................................................................................201
Figure 7.46: ‘GraphAll’ graph for a Vertical SAA and 7 PZ3s (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ............................202
Figure 7.47: ‘GraphAll’ graph for a Horizontal SAA, 12 PZz3s and 2 EPCs (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ...................202
Figure 7.48: Warning message after clicking ‘Export data’. ...............................................................................203
Figure 7.49: ‘Export Data Settings’ window. ......................................................................................................203
Figure 7.50: ‘FilterSAA’ and ‘FilterSensors’ have been turned ON (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ....................204
Figure 7.51: ‘Logarithmic Time’ and ‘Highlights’ ON (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ........................................205
December 2014
xvii
Figure 7.52: Preparing for a ‘Time Subset’: turn Y and PZ off, set SAA to single and select the time frame
(Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). .......................................................................................................................... 205
Figure 7.53: The view after turning ‘Time Subset’ on (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ...................................... 206
Figure 7.54: A single SAA is showing (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). ................................................................ 207
Figure 7.55: All SAAs are showing (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). .................................................................... 207
Figure 7.56: Notice the ‘Zoom’ in comparison to the scale (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). .............................. 208
Figure 7.57: X Graph and Y Graph (Project: large_shear). ................................................................................. 208
Figure 7.58: X graph only for horizontal SAAs (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ............................................................. 209
Figure 7.59: ‘Vertex Selection’ window.............................................................................................................. 210
Figure 7.60: Vertex 1 = 30 and Vertex 2 = 40. Notice the two colors on the XY graph (Project: large_shear). .. 210
Figure 7.61: Vertex 1 = 1 and Vertex 2 = 24 (Project: horiz_pz_epc). ................................................................ 210
Figure 7.62: A time subset was selected in the Variable T graph and then reflected in all other graphs (Project:
large_shear). ...................................................................................................................................................... 211
Figure 7.63: A time subset was selected in the Variable T graph and then reflected in the other graph (Project:
horiz_pz_epc). .................................................................................................................................................... 211
Figure 7.64: Selected times in Variable T graph are displayed in all other graphs. Only two points can be
selected at one time (Project: large_shear). ...................................................................................................... 212
Figure 7.65: Selected times in Variable T graph are displayed in the other graph. Only two points can be
selected at one time (Project: horiz_pz_epc). .................................................................................................... 212
xviii
December 2014
SAA Software
This page is left intentionally blank
December 2014
xix
SAA Software
1. Introduction
Figure 1.1: ShapeAccelArray (SAA) on a reel.
Measurand’s ShapeAccelArray (SAA) is a flexible, calibrated 3D measuring system. It measures 2D and
3D shape and 3D vibration using a compact array of MEMs accelerometers and proven ShapeTape /
ShapeRope algorithms. Unlike collections of tilt sensors or arrays of sensors that bend in a single
direction, SAAs require no other guides or fixturing. They bend freely, without a preferred axis, in 2
degrees of freedom and may be mounted vertically or horizontally.
Measurand develops software that converts raw data and software for viewing the converted data.
All Measurand software is available free of charge on our website. This manual covers the use of most
Measurand software available to the user as well as basic instruction on the use of third party
software (Campbell Scientific LoggerNet).
1.1 System Requirements
SAASuite is a portal to all Measruand and Campbell Scientific (CS) Data Logger software used in
operating SAAs. It provides access to a variety of Measurand and Data Logger applications.
Figure 1.2: Campbell Scientific CS Data Loggers: CR1000, CR800 & CR3000.
Measurand recommends a PC with the following minimum system requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Windows XP or higher OS.
1 Gigabyte RAM
100 MB of hard drive space.
100 MB more for data storage.
The system must be running Microsoft .Net 3.5 or higher.
One available USB Port.
December 2014
1
Note: If unsure about the Microsoft .NET version, go to ‘Control Panel -> Programs and
Features’. Scroll through the list of Programs to find the .NET version available. If it is less
than 3.5, update to the newest .NET framework from Microsoft.
1.2 Installation
All SAAs come with a USB memory stick with the SAASuite software which includes all SAA
applications.
SAASuite Software, which gives access to all Measurand’s application and utilities, is also available
for download through Measurand’s website from this location:
http://www.measurandgeotechnical.com/software.html.
Note: Ensure the latest version of SAASuite (Available on our website) and all required
“Calibration” files (available through SAASuite) are installed.
1.3 Manual Overview
When viewing this manual, there are a few conventions that may help.
‘buttons’
2
When a word, or string of words, has single quotes AND is underlined then
it is the name of a button, a specific window or menu item.
‘folder’
When a word, or string of words, has single quotes then it is a file/folder
location or column name in a window.
“file”
When a word, or string of words, has double quotes then it is a file name,
partial file name or standard use of double quotes.
Sections & Figures
When the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’ is bolded in the document then it can
be used as a link to its ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’.
Attention
When a word, or a string of words, is in bold then it is meant to stand out
and be paid attention to.
December 2014
SAA Software
2. SAASuite
SAASuite is the central access point to the various applications and utilities that exist for SAAs. It also
provides updates and beta versions as well as this Software Manual in PDF format that will open to
the chapter for each application and utility.
2.1 Main Application Tab
This tab gives access to the most commonly used applications and utilities.
Figure 2.1: ‘Main Application’ tab of SAASuite with labeling.
Application Buttons
Clicking any one of these buttons will open the application labeled on the button. If the button is
green or blue then the application or utility is installed and ready to use, blue denotes that the
downloaded version is Beta. If the button is red then the application or utility is not installed. To install
required applications or utilities go to Section 2.1.3.





December 2014
SAARecorder (Section 6)
LoggerNet (Section 4)
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5)
SAAView (Section 7)
SAACR_FileGenerator Utility (Section 3)
3
Note: If an error message appears complaining about a missing “.dll” file this could be due
to the missing Runtime Environment.
User Manual Buttons
Clicking any one of these buttons opens a “*.pdf” file of this manual at the chapter of the associated
application or utility. All chapters, sub-chapters and figures are linked, the user can jump through the
manual clicking on the Section or Figure number either throughout the document or in the “Table of
Contents”.
User Manuals are also available through the ‘Help’ menu at the top of the window, highlight ‘Manuals’
and select one of the manuals available.
Get Software/”Calibration” files Button
Figure 2.2: ‘Get Software / “Calibration” files’ window.
This window can be accessed in two ways:
1) Click the ‘Get Software / “Calibration” files’ button on the ‘Main Applications’ window.
2) Click the ‘Help’ menu at the top of the window, highlight ‘Get Software’.
This window informs the user if there are updates available and is used to:
1. Download and install the initial Application or Utilities.
2. Download and install the updates for the Applications or Utilities.
3. Download and install the Beta Version of the Applications or Utilities.
4
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 2.3: ‘Download’ buttons and application / utility status.
The Beta Version of an application or utility is a working version that has not completed the Validation
testing process. These versions have the latest updates, but might not be as reliable as the most recent
production versions since they have not been fully tested.
The software available for download through SAASuite are as follows:









SAARecorder (Section 6)
o Used to view and record live data.
o Used to test that the SAA(s) are setup and connected properly.
SAAView (Section 7)
o Used to view the data after conversion from raw data.
o If an error message appears complaining about a missing “.dll” file this could be due
to the missing Runtime Environment.
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) / SAACR_ Utilities (Section 3, Appendix A & Appendix B)
o These utilities are required for converting and manipulating raw data.
o If the Runtime Environment has not been downloaded and installed, it will
automatically download and install with this option.
Runtime Environment
o Required to run SAAView and SAACR_raw2data and SAACR_ Utilities.
SAACR_FileGenerator Utility (Section 3)
o This application enables the user to automate the recording process of the CS Data
Logger and create a file with conversion settings for the converter SAACR_raw2data.
SAACR_DataChecker (Appendix B)
o Used to view and filter raw SAA data that has been recorded with a Campbell
Scientific CS Data Logger, to check for data issues.
SAASuite (Section 2)
o This is available for updates and Beta versions.
“Calibration” files (Section Error! Reference source not found.)
o Are required for all SAAs to work with the software.
Download All
o Choosing this will download all files, except Beta versions, and install them.
December 2014
5
2.1.3.1 Communication Settings Button
Figure 2.4: The ‘Communications Settings’ window.
The default protocol for downloads, for Measurand Software, is FTP. This window allows users to
change the network settings, depending on requirements, to HTTP or to setup a Proxy Server. The
users internal Network or IT Administration will need to give the user all the Proxy Server settings.
File Menu
Clicking this menu provides an ‘Exit’ menu item, choosing this will exit SAASuite. This can also be
achieved by clicking the red x at the top right corner of any SAASuite window.
Help Menu
The ‘Help’ menu gives quick access to Manuals, Software Registration, ‘Software Download’ window
and contact information for Measurand. This menu is available for each tab.
6
December 2014
SAA Software
2.1.5.1 Manuals Menu Item
Figure 2.5: The drop-down list for any ‘Instruction Manual’ available from SAASuite.
There are three main manuals available from Measurand. They are:



SAA Description & Installation Manual
o This manual is considered a Field Manual and gives information and instructions for
the SAA itself.
SAAPZ
o This manual gives information and instruction for the SAAPZ Digital / Vibrating Wire
Piezometer.
SAA Software
o This manual gives information and instruction for all publically available Measurand
Software. This includes all the SAA Applications, Utilities as well as SAASuite.
December 2014
7
2.1.5.2 Register Menu Item
Figure 2.6: The website page that opens when 'Register' is selected from the ‘Help’ menu.
Measurand recommends users to register their software if they wish to receive notifications for
software updates or software / hardware issues.
2.1.5.3 Get Software Menu Item
This menu item opens the window in Section 2.1.3.
2.1.5.4 About Menu Item
Figure 2.7: The ‘About’ window for SAASuite.
8
December 2014
SAA Software
The ‘About’ window gives contact information for Measurand, the website, SAASuite version number
and a link to the Software Registration web page (Section 2.1.5.2). This information is useful when
issues arise and Measurand’s assistance is required. We will always ask for the Software Version of
any application or utilities that is in question.
2.2 SAACR_ Utilities Tab
Figure 2.8: The ‘SAACR_ Utilities’ tab window.
This tab provides access to all the SAACR_ Utilities except SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) and
SAACR_FileGenerator Utility (Section 3). These two utilities are so commonly used that they are
available on the ‘Main Applications’ tab.





December 2014
SAACR_DataChecker (Appendix B)
SAACR_raw2raw_concat (Appendix A.1)
SAACR_cart2cart (Appendix A.2)
SAACR_cart2cart_matchup (Appendix A.3)
SAACR_cart2manycart (Appendix A.4)
9
2.3 Legacy Applications Tab
Figure 2.9: The ‘Legacy Applications’ tab window.
This tab is for applications that are no longer supported by Measurand but is still used by some users.
10
December 2014
SAA Software
3. SAACR_FileGenerator
This application allows the user to automate the recording process of the CS Data Logger with
SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.1) and to create a file with conversion settings for the converter
SAACR_raw2data with SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration Tab (Section 3.2).
The SAACR_FileGenerator Utility can be found on the ‘Main Applications’ tab of SAASuite. Measurand
highly recommends that all CS Data Logger users start by running this application.
SAAs are interfaced to COM ports on the logger through either an SAA232 (one SAA per COM port),
or an SAA232-5 (up to five SAAs per COM port).
This application produces three files:



Include file
o Example “SAA_include_V3_06.cr8”.
o From the SAACR_FileGenerator Tab
o Specifically for SAAs and allows the CS Data Logger to communicate appropriately
with the SAA.
o Also handles Measurand non-SAA sensors that use the same communication protocol
as SAAs. SAAPZ is an example of a Measurand non-SAA sensor.
CS Data Logger “Main Program” file
o From the SAACR_FileGenerator Tab.
o This file is created based on the information entered in the SAACR_FileGenerator Tab.
o This file is named by the user, it is recommended that the project name be used.
Project preferences file
o “pref_projects.txt”.
o From SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration Tab.
o For automating SAACR_raw2data conversions.
3.1 SAACR_FileGenerator Tab
This application enables the user to automate the recording process of the CS Data Logger. The user
may set the file location, reading interval, SAA serial number and the channel they reside on (if an
SAA232-5 is being used) as well as the number of samples to average. The hook up of the CS Data
Logger must match exactly the description in the window.
December 2014
11
Figure 3.1: The ‘SAACR_FileGenerator’ tab window.
WARNING! It is recommended to either hook up the Campbell Scientific Data Logger while
filling this information in or make accurate notes of the SAA serial number, Channel (if
using an SAA232-5) and COM Port.
Open File Button
This button allows the user to select an existing Campbell Scientific data logger program that was used
for SAA data collection. File associations are “.cr8”, “.cr3” or “.cr1”.
The SAACR_FileGenerator Tab will be populated with the settings according to that program. This
could be used to review CS Data Logger settings as well as altering the current settings.
SAARecorder Folder Field
This field needs to point to the local installation folder for SAARecorder. If SAARecorder has been
installed in its default location then this does not need to be changed.
Project Title Field
This field allows the user to specify a title or name for the project which will be written into the
program. This field is not required but recommended.
Number of Preliminary Samples
Preliminary samples are taken before the reading interval starts, this is intended to be a
troubleshooting tool. It allows for an initial check that everything is working properly. The default is 5
samples.
Reading Interval Field & Units Field
Reading interval is the time between SAA observations made within the program (also known as “scan
interval”). An SAA can perform measurements at 400Hz, thus taking an average of 1000 samples
12
December 2014
SAA Software
(typical value) in less than 10 seconds. However, sufficient time must be included to account for other
commands and functions within the CS Data Logger, some of which do not occur immediately with
each collection.
The number of SAAs connected to a CS Data Logger also affects the collection time. It has been
Measurand’s finding that the logger can work properly for an extended period of time, but usually
eventually malfunctions when the reading interval is less than 10 minutes. Therefore, the suggested
minimum reading interval is 10 minutes.
For greatest certainty, it is wise to increase this to 15 min allowing for circumstances and
configurations not yet seen. Contact Measurand (Appendix K) if sampling intervals less than 10
minutes are required.
WARNING! The fastest reading interval is 10 minutes, going faster could cause the CS Data
Logger to eventually crash.
Logger Type Drop-Down List
The user must specify for which CS Data Logger this program is intended.
CR800  creates a “*.cr8” file
CR1000  creates a “*.cr1” file
CR3000  creates a “*.cr3” file
Sensor Fields
This is the area where the SAAs and SAAPZs can be set up. The maximum number of SAAs is 10 for the
CR800 and 20 for the CR1000 and CR3000.
Figure 3.2: Sensor Fields.
3.1.7.1 SAA
To turn an SAA/SAAPZ on or off click the numbered box. If there is a checkmark then the SAA is on.
Figure 3.3: ‘SAA’ checkbox.
December 2014
13
3.1.7.2 232(-5) Channel
The user must specify if this SAA/SAAPZ is connected to an SAA232 or to which channel of a SAA2325 it is connected (see Figure 3.4).
Figure 3.4: ‘SAA232 or SAA232-5 Channel’ selection.
3.1.7.3 COM Port
The user must specify to which COM port the SAA/SAAPZ is connected on the CS Data Logger.
Figure 3.5: ‘COM Port’ dropdown.
3.1.7.4 Serial Number
In this field the user must enter a single SAA serial number or a comma separated list of 1 SAA and up
to 3 SAAPZ (up to 4 SAAPZs if there is no SAA) serial numbers. The serial numbers are physically
marked on the “cable-end” and the “top-pipe” of the SAA/SAAPZ.
Figure 3.6: ‘Serial Number’ field.
3.1.7.5 Averaging Level
The number of SAA samples used to compute an average reading, using the ‘Averaging’ feature of
SAAs. Values can range from 100 to 25500. The larger the number of samples the better the precision,
but computational time also increases. For most applications Measurand recommends using an
averaging level of 1000 as this level provides a good balance between measurement precision and
required computation time.
Figure 3.7: ‘Averaging’ field.
14
December 2014
SAA Software
Generate File Button
Clicking this button creates Campbell Scientific data logger files according to the information entered
in the SAACR_FileGenerator Tab. A ‘Save File’ window will start, allowing the user to save “program”
and “Include” files wherever they choose. Enter the desired file name, Measurand recommends the
project name, for the “Main Program” file and click ‘Save’. A separate “SAA_Include” file (see Figure
3.8 for example) will be generated at the same time as the “Main Program” file.
Figure 3.8: Saving a CS Data Logger program created using the SAACR_FileGenerator utility.
What to do with the File
Both files, the “Include” file and the “Main Program”, must be loaded onto the logger for the “Main
Program” file to work properly. The “Include” file needs to be loaded onto the logger FIRST with the
“Main Program” file after. To compile and use these files please refer to the LoggerNet Section 4.1.3.
The “Main Program” file can be viewed and edited to add other, non-Measurand, sensors. See
LoggerNet Section 4.1.3 and Appendix G.
3.2 SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration Tab
Allows the user to create a file with conversion settings for the converter SAACR_raw2data (Section
5). The conversion settings are found in a file called “pref_project.txt”. This tab window can be used
to configure any automatic data conversions that will be run using the SAACR_raw2data application
by creating the “pref_project.txt” file.
The “pref_project.txt” file is also created on the first run of SAACR_raw2data (Section 5.6).
December 2014
15
Figure 3.9: The ‘SAACRRaw2DataConfiguration’ tab window.
Raw Data Folder Field
The folder containing (or that will contain) the raw data to be converted. The user must direct the
utility to the folder where all the raw data for this project will be stored.
Data Logger Name Field
Enter the name of the CS Data Logger as it was set-up using LoggerNet (Section 4).
Time Zone Off set Drop-Down List
The default setting is 0:00. Any non-zero offset will change all the timestamps on the data by that
amount. Most users leave the offset at 0:00.
Export Settings Button
By clicking the ‘Export Settings’ button the window in Figure 3.10 opens. The user must select an
output format for the Cartesian data. The output formats are explained in Section 5.3.6.1 DIY
Subfolder and Section 5.5.3.2 DIY Format Definitions, and also in Section 5.5.3.1 Current Export
Formats and Data Types and Appendix H.1 Legacy Formats.
16
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 3.10: ‘DIY Export Settings’ window.
Non-SAA Sensors / Virtual SAAs / Convergence SAAs
PZ3:
These are conventional vibrating-wire (VW) piezometers, using a conventional VW interface to the CS
Data Logger. The “3” indicates they are “third-party”, or “non-Measurand” sensors. The CS Data
Logger program creates a raw data table of “digits” and temperatures or frequencies and resistance
depending on how the program was written.
The “Site” file designates which columns of the data table are to be used in the conversion to pressure,
and what units the raw data is in and what the desired unit for the pressure should be. It also contains
other site-specific data such as elevations, depths, latitude and longitude. The non_saa_coeffs files
contain the calibration constants of the sensors.
EPC3 and SG3:
Earth Pressure Cells (EPCs) and Strain Gauges (SGs) are handled almost the same as PZ3 sensors. These
are conventional vibrating-wire (VW) sensors, using a conventional VW interface to the CS Data
Logger. The CS Data Logger program creates a raw data table of “digits” and temperatures or
frequencies and resistance depending on how the program was written.
The “Site” file designates which columns of the data table are to be used in the conversion to
engineering units, and what units the raw data is in and what the desired unit for the pressure should
be. It also contains other site-specific data such as elevations, depths, latitude and longitude. The
“non_saa_coeffs” files contain the calibration constants of the sensors.
Virtual SAAs:
Are when multiple SAAs are laid end-to-end (usually with some overlapping) and used as a single long
SAA.
Convergence SAA:
December 2014
17
Are SAAs that are placed in a loop formation, usually around part or all of the circumference of a
tunnel and includes both horizontal and vertical portions.
3.2.5.1 Checkboxes
Measurand Piezometers
Check if Measurand SAAPZ data needs to be converted.
Piezometers
Check if 3rd party (non-Measurand) Piezometers data needs
to be converted.
Strain Gauges
Check if strain gauge data needs to be converted.
Earth Pressure Cell
Check if earth pressure cell data needs to be converted
Virtual / Convergence SAA
Check to combine 2 or more SAAs into 1 SAA or use the
SAA in a convergence utility.
3.2.5.2 “Site” file Path Field
Path to the “Site” file. A “Site” file is needed if any of the above checkboxes have been checked. For
help creating a “Site” file, refer to Section 5.8 or contact Measurand (Appendix K).
3.2.5.3 Additional Configuration Button
This button should only be used when using non-Measurand sensors or legacy Measurand Analog
Piezometers. Once clicked a new window opens prompting the user to provide a little more
information. Data tables are created by the CS Data Logger when third party sensors are attached to
the CS Data Logger, these tables sometimes have a user defined name. They should be in the same
folder as the raw data files.
Figure 3.11: The ‘Additional Configuration’ window.
The first information request (Measurand sensors) is whether the Piezometer is a ‘Measurand Analog
Piezometer’. This is a legacy feature, unless otherwise told by Measurand do not check this checkbox.
18
December 2014
SAA Software
In the next section (Non Measurand Sensors), see Figure 3.11, shows the dialog for entering “CR*.dat”
data table names for non-Measurand, non-SAA sensors. Supported types are piezometers (PZ), strain
gauges (SG), and earth pressure cells (EPC). The “3” in the default names refers to “third-party” (nonMeasurand) sensors. These files may have a user defined name but will be in the same folder as the
raw data.
Sensor Fields
Figure 3.12: Sensor Fields.
3.2.6.1 SAA
These text boxes will be filled with SAA serial numbers that have been entered in the
SAACR_FileGenerator Tab. This is done once the raw data folder is selected (Section 3.2.1).
3.2.6.2 Orientation
Select the orientation of the SAA, either horizontal or vertical. This information will be used in the
modeling process (any orientation may be set for Convergence SAAs as it will be converted).
3.2.6.3 Reference End
Select the reference end of the SAA, either “Near (Cable) End” or “Far End”. All data will be relative
to the selected end.
3.2.6.4 Azimuth
Enter any desired azimuth (compass heading) offset that should be applied to the SAA, positive
degrees is clockwise.
3.2.6.5 Segments Used
Enter the first and last segment that are used for the SAA. Only segments at either end should be
turned off (1 is the first segment at the near end). Segments in the middle of an SAA that are not
working should be slaved (see Slaved Segments below).
3.2.6.6 Slaved Segments
Slaving enables virtual repair of a damaged segment. This is done by assigning it the tilt of the previous
segment. This is done in the order of calculation, where “1” is the segment number at the cable-end.
Enter a comma separated list of any segments of the SAA that should get the same tilt as the ‘previous’
segment. Segments should be slaved if they are not working properly. Note that at the cable-end of
the SAA, there is no ‘previous’ segment so the utility assigns the tilt to the nearest un-slaved
subsequent segment.
Generate Config File Button
Clicking this button creates a configuration preference file according to the information entered in
the converter configuration tab. The configuration preference file, named “pref_project.txt”, is used
by SAACR_raw2data to convert raw data with the settings selected in SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (or
selected during the first run of SAACR_raw2data).
A window will pop-up telling the user where the saved “pref_project.txt” file is saved. It will save in
the folder specified in the ‘Raw Data Folder’ Field. To use this file please refer to the LoggerNet Section
4.2.4.
December 2014
19
Figure 3.13: Saving a conversion preference file using the ‘SAACR_FileGenerator’ utility.
What to do with the File
Once the “pref_project.txt” file has been generated, it is possible to set up the PC to automatically
convert the data into a format viewable in SAAView. This is accomplished using the LoggerNet ‘Task
Master’ utility.
20
December 2014
SAA Software
4. LoggerNet
4.1 Setting Up the CS Data Logger
Note: The CS Data Logger setup can be done prior to taking the earth station in the field
for installation, saving time in the field.
Setup of the CS Data Logger to collect SAA data requires a basic understanding of Campbell Scientific’s
LoggerNet software. For more information on Campbell Scientifics’s LoggerNet software, visit the
Campbell Scientific website to obtain the user manual (http://www.campbellsci.ca/). The LoggerNet
toolbar is shown in Figure 4.1, for the purpose of this manual, the following utilities will be used:



Setup
o Utility used for connecting to or changing connection settings of a CS Data Logger (e.g,
the CR1000, CR3000, or CR800).
o This utility is found in the ‘Main’ menu.
Connect
o Utility used for managing device connection and manual data collection.
o This utility is found in the ‘Main’ menu.
Task Master
o Utility used for automating data collection and conversion.
o This utility is found in the ‘Main’ menu.
Figure 4.1: LoggerNet ‘Main’ menu.

CRBasic Editor
o Editor and compiler used for Campbell Scientific programs.
o This utility is found in the ‘Program’ menu.
December 2014
21
Figure 4.2: LoggerNet ‘Program’ menu.
Setting up the Logger
Before connecting to the CS Data Logger with LoggerNet the Data Logger must be Setup. Under the
‘Main’ menu (See Figure 4.1) click ‘Setup’, the Setup window opens.
Figure 4.3: ‘Setup’ window for LoggerNet.
To start, click ‘Add’ and an EZSetup Wizard starts.
22
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 4.4: ‘EZSetup Wizard’ introduction window.

Click ‘Next’.
4.1.1.1 Communication Setup
 Select the Campbell Scientific Data logger that is in use for this setup from the image based
list in the middle of the window.
 Enter a name for the data logger, it is recommended the user choose a name that is
memorable as it will be required in setting up SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration (Section 3.2.2)
and possibly elsewhere.
Figure 4.5: Data Logger types and name.
December 2014
23


Click ‘Next’.
Select the mode of communication that will be used for this data logger.
o Direct Connect
 Is selected when the data logger is communicating locally, using a PC and
an interface device or cable connected to a PC’s RS232 port. (e.g. SAA232
or SAA232-5).
o Phone Modem
 Is selected when the data logger is communicating using a phone modem
and a PC is connected to another phone modem (either internal or
external modem).
o IP Port
 Is selected when a device at the data logger site accepts a static IP address
and is connected to the internet. This device could be an NL100 or TCP/IP
serial service interface.
o RF95/RF3XX
 Is selected when RF95 or RF300 series modems are used for
communication between a PC and the data logger. Repeaters are allowed
in this configuration.
o RF4XX (Non-PakBus)
 Is selected when RF400 series modems are used for communication
between a PC and the data logger. (See LoggerNet Connection help for
more details)
o MD9
 Is selected when communication with the data logger is accomplished
over an MD9 network. A base MD9 is connected to the PC, and a remote
is connected to the data logger.
Figure 4.6: ‘Communication Setup’ connection type.


24
Click ‘Next’.
Select the PC’s COM Port where the data logger is attached.
December 2014
SAA Software

The COM Port Communication Delay should be set to ‘0’ seconds.
Figure 4.7: ‘COM Port Selection’ window.



Click ‘Next’.
The data logger settings are unique to each user’s setup.
o Refer to the ‘Settings Help’ button on the bottom left of the window in Figure 4.8.
o Refer to the LoggerNet Manual.
o Contact Measurand for assistance, Appendix K.
For Measurand communication devices like the SAA232 and SAA232-5, a high Baud Rate is
acceptable.
Figure 4.8: ‘Data Logger Settings’ window.


Click ‘Next’.
This section is only required if a security code was applied to the data logger itself.
December 2014
25
Figure 4.9: ‘Data Logger Security’ window.
4.1.1.2 Data Logger Settings
 Click ‘Next’.
 The ‘Communication Setup Summary’ window gives a synopsis of the data logger setup just
completed.
 If everything is accurate then click ‘Next’.
Figure 4.10: ‘Communication Setup Summary’ window.
At this point the user could click ‘Finish’, it is recommended to run the communication test and check
the data logger clock by clicking ‘Next’. The options available:


26
Communication Test
o This test will ensure the data logger has been set up correctly.
The data logger clock
December 2014
SAA Software
o
o
o
Check the data logger clock.
Reset the data logger clock.
Add a Time Zone Offset.
The following options will not be available until the user uploads programs using the ‘Connect’
process.



Data Logger Program
o Allows the user to send a data logger program that was created using SCWin.
Data Logger Output Files
o These tables will not be available until the user uploads a program using the ‘Connect’
process.
Scheduled Collection
o This enables the setting of a schedule.
o This can also be set later using SAACRFileGenerator.
The data logger is now mostly setup, return to the wizard once the ‘Connect’ process is complete.
Figure 4.11: A completed first run through of the Setup.
Creating a “Main Program” file
Program files for collecting SAA data using the CS Data Loggers can be created using the Measurand
SAACR_FileGenerator Utility (Section 3).
Compiling SAA Program Files
Once the “Main Program” (“*.crn” where n is either 8, 1 or 3) and the “SAA_Include” file
(SAACR_FileGenerator Tab Section 3.1.8) have been successfully generated, the “Main Program” file
can be viewed using the LoggerNet ‘CRBasic Editor’. At this time, it is also possible to add other code
December 2014
27
for instruments or powering the SW12V port on the logger. An example of a program in which
additional sensors have been added is provided in Appendix 0.
Once the code has been added, it should be compiled to make sure that there are no errors. To
successfully compile the new program, the “SAA_Include” file generated with the program is also
required. The “SAA_Include” file should be placed in the same directory as the “Main Program” to
avoid compilation errors. Note that the “SAA_Include” file will not successfully compile alone, it gets
compiled as part of the “Main Program”. Once the two files are located within the same directory, it
is possible to save and compile the program as illustrated in Figure 4.12.
Note: The “SAA_Include” file is not meant to compile on its own. The “SAA_Include” file
should be placed in the same directory as the “Main Program” file. When the Main Logger
program is compiled, the “SAA_Include” file is referenced and is compiled as well. Compile
errors will appear if the “SAA_Include” file is compiled.
Figure 4.12: Saving and Compiling the SAA logger program.
Note: When using other sensors with the CR1000, it is advised to add the necessary code
to the CR1000 program generated for the SAA rather than trying to integrate the SAA
specific program with the other sensors. Appendix 0 provides examples for integrating
other sensors into the program.
28
December 2014
SAA Software
After CRBasic compiles the code a similar message seen in Figure 4.13 should appear. The message
informs the user of the compiler used, version, the program compiled and how it was compiled, in
this instance the program was compiled in sequential mode.
Figure 4.13: After Compilation in the CRBasic program.
The compiler creates a “*.tdf” file with the same name as the “Main Program”.
Figure 4.14: The files after compiling, "*.tdf" file is created.
Uploading Program Files to the CR1000
Once the program has successfully compiled, all the program files including the “SAA_Include” file
must be uploaded to the CR1000 before the “Main Program” is run. This is accomplished in LoggerNet
using the ‘Connect’ utility (Figure 4.15).
December 2014
29
Figure 4.15: ‘Selecting File Control’ in the LoggerNet ‘Connect’ utility.



Click on the Station (Data Logger) of interest.
Click ‘Connect’, if there is only one the application will connect automatically.
Click ‘File Control’ button.
Figure 4.16: ‘File Control’ window, where files are uploaded to the data logger.
In the ‘File Control’ window, repeat the following steps until all files have been sent to the data logger,
ensure that the “Main Program” is selected last:


30
Click the ‘Send’ button.
An ‘Open File’ window opens.
December 2014
SAA Software


Select the desired file. (First the “Include” file then the “Main Program”)
A ‘Select Run Options’ window opens.
o If the file selected IS NOT the “Main Program” then DE-SELECT the ‘Run Now’ and
‘Run On Power-up’ options.
Figure 4.17: ‘Select Run Options’ should only be selected for the “Main Program”.
Note since the run program options are selected, the “Main Program” will compile at this point (Figure
4.18). Alternatively the ‘Save, Compile and Send’ option in the CRBasic Editor in the ‘Program’ menu
can be used. When prompted for Run Options, ‘Run Now’ and ‘Run On Power-up’ should be selected.
Note: If the program is run to test the logger set-up, make sure to remove garbage data
from the logger by clicking the ‘Stop Program’ button. When prompted, choose the ‘Clear
the Program’ option. When finished setting up on the site, click ‘Run Options’ and select
‘Run Now’ and ‘Run on Power-up’ to start collecting data. To make sure no garbage data is
left behind, when prompted select ‘Delete associated data tables created by’.
Figure 4.18: Compiling after “Main Program” was uploaded.
December 2014
31
Figure 4.19: ‘File Control’ window after the “Main Program” has been compiled, it is now running.
Once the files have been uploaded, compiled and run it is now time to manage the files in Setup
(Section 4.1.5). Ensure the program has been stopped by clicking ‘Stop Program..’ in the ‘File Control’
Window. Go to the ‘Main’ menu and select ‘Setup’ again.
Data File Management
It is critical that the data files generated by the CS Data Logger are effectively managed. The output
folders for CS Data Logger data files are specified under the ‘Data Files’ tab in the LoggerNet ‘Setup’
utility (Figure 4.20). By default, the data is stored in the ‘C:\CampbellSci\LoggerNet’ directory and
given a name of “DataloggerName_TableName_#.dat”.
It is suggested that the output folder location be changed from this default location to another folder
prior to collecting data. It is generally easiest to create a data folder in the ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\’ directory to facilitate automated data conversions later on. An
‘Archive_Raw’ folder should be manually created in the data folder for conversion purposes.
Figure 4.20: Specifying the destination of data files using the LoggerNet ‘Setup’ utility.
1. Go To LoggerNet ‘Main’ menu – ‘Setup’.
32
December 2014
SAA Software
2. Double Click the desired Project on the left of the ‘Setup’ window (Figure 4.11).
3. Click ‘Data Files’ progress option on the left of the window (Figure 4.20).
4. Change the ‘Output File Name’ location, keeping the file name. (It is easier to do this manually
(typing) rather than using the ‘Browse’ button)
o The default is ‘C:\Campbellsci\LoggerNet\CRxxx_PROJECT_INFO.DAT’.
o Change
to
‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\[ProjectName]\
[ProjectName]_PROJECT_INFO.DAT’.
5. Do this for all Tables.
Note: If the output file name is changed, DO NOT change the output table name, only
change the folder location.
The ‘File Output’ option should be set to ‘Append to End of File’ (Figure 4.20). The CS Data Logger
keeps track of the last record that was successfully sent to the destination folder. If the output file
already exists, the new data will be appended to the end of the file. If the file does not exist or has
been moved elsewhere, a new file will be created with all records that have not yet been recorded.
The ‘Output Format’ should be left at the default ASCII Table Data, Long Header (TOA5).
Note: Before a new project begins, any CS Data Logger data files residing in the output file
directory should be removed. Otherwise, data from the new project may get concatenated
to the existing data file, causing abnormalities in the results.
4.2 Collecting Data from the CS Data Logger
Manual Data Collection
For each Project setup, the data files that must be recorded are:





“PROJECT_INFO”
“SAAx_DATA”
“SERIAL_ERRORS”
“LOGGER_DIAGNOSTICS”
“SAA_DIAGNOSTICS”
Data files scheduled to be collected are listed in the ‘Data Files’ tab of the Setup utility and have a
green ‘check mark’ next to them. Data Tables “Public” and ”Status” are not required for data
collections as they only store one record of data at a time. They are used only for real time viewing.
Ensure that these tables are not selected for Scheduled Collection by de-selecting the ‘Included for
Scheduled collection’ option for that table.
December 2014
33
Until data collection is properly configured, scheduled data collection should be disabled. This is
accomplished by unchecking the ‘Scheduled Collection Enabled’ checkbox in the Schedule tab of the
LoggerNet ‘Setup’ utility (Figure 4.21). Data can only be collected now by forcing a data download in
the LoggerNet ‘Connect’ utility by clicking on ‘Collect Now’ (Figure 4.22).
Whenever the CS Data Logger is connected using the ‘Connect’ utility in LoggerNet ‘Main’ menu, the
station’s clock time should be checked to ensure that valid time stamps are being applied to the data.
Correct time stamps cannot be easily recovered from erroneous values. The CS Data Logger’s clock is
set by clicking on ‘Set Station Clock’ in the Connect utility, which will assign the time currently set on
the PC in use to the CS Data Logger.
Note: If the PC in use is using Daylight Savings Time, take care NOT to disrupt the time
setting currently employed by the CS Data Logger. If the station clock is adjusted to match
Daylight Savings Time on the PC in use, gaps or overwrites in the data file will occur.
Figure 4.21: Disabling scheduled data collection.
Once sufficient time has elapsed to ensure that data has been collected from the SAAs (based upon
the reading frequency), data can be manually collected by clicking on ‘Collect Now’ in the Connect
utility. A summary of the data collected is summarized as illustrated in Figure 4.22.
34
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 4.22: Collecting data using the LoggerNet ‘Connect’ utility.
Note: Data is collected based upon scheduled interval, not upon elapsed time since the
program was started. If the program is written so that data is collected every 30 minutes
and it is 29 minutes after the hour, data will be collected in 1 minute. If it 31 minutes after
the hour, data will be collected in 29 minutes.
Automated Data Collection
Once the manual data collection process has been tested, the data collection process can be
automated by specifying the desired data collection interval in the ‘Scheduled Collection’ tab of the
LoggerNet ‘Setup’ utility (Figure 4.23).

Check the ‘Scheduled Collection Enabled’ checkbox.
o As long as the destination CS Data Logger is connected (wired or wirelessly), data will
be downloaded to the Output File Directory.
o The Campbell Scientific Raven X manual provides details of configuring a wireless
connection with the CS Data Logger.
o The Campbell Scientific LoggerNet manual provides details of configuring a
connection with the CS Data Logger using a land line.
o A trial test should always be conducted before beginning a project to ensure that the
system is performing as expected.
December 2014
35
Figure 4.23: Enabling scheduled data collection.
Manual Data Conversions
It is possible to use the SAACR_raw2data utility to convert SAA data, and data from the following
instruments: vibrating wire piezometers, strain gauges, and vibrating wire earth pressure cells. It is
also possible to convert multiple SAAs into one long “superset” SAA (SAACR_raw2data Section 5.8).
In order to use any functionalities beyond ordinary conversion of SAAs, the user will need to create a
“Site” file for the project and place it in the appropriate SAARecorder folder (‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\Calibrations\site\[site filename]’). If the site folder does not exist in the
‘C:\Measurand Inc.\SAARecorder\Calibrations’ folder, the user will need to create it to save the “Site”
files there.
The user will also need to place the “Calibration” files for the other instruments into the appropriate
SAARecorder calibrations folder (‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Calibrations\non_saa_coeffs’). For
more information on these aspects and how to use the converter, please refer to the
SAACR_raw2data Section 5.
Once the conversion is completed, the user will be prompted on whether or not they want to view
the data using SAAView (Section 7).
Automated Data Conversions
Automated data conversion requires generating a “pref_project.txt” file. This can be done in two
ways. This first way does not require having any raw data for conversion. In this case, the
SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration Utility in SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.2) can be used to
generate the “pref_project.txt” file which contains conversion settings needed when converting data
automatically.
Once the “pref_project.txt” file has been generated, it is possible to set up the PC to automatically
convert the data into a format viewable in SAAView. This is accomplished using the LoggerNet ‘Task
Master’ utility in the ‘Main’ menu.
36
December 2014
SAA Software
To add a task in the Task Master:
1. Click on the CS Data Logger of interest.
2. Click the ‘Add After’ button, bottom of window.
3. Under ‘How Task_n Starts’ tab,
a. In the ‘Station Event Type’,
b. Select the ‘After Successful Call’ option (Figure 4.24).
Figure 4.24: Creating a task using the LoggerNet 'Task Master' utility.
4. Under ‘What Task_n Does’ tab,
a. Under ‘Execute File’,
b. Check ‘Execute File’,
c. File Name:
 ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\SAACR_raw2data.exe’
 Unless moved, this is the default location for the SAACR_raw2data
executable.
d. Command Line Options:
 “C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\[project folder]\pref_project.txt”
 This entry MUST be In quotations (“ “) since there is a space in the
C:\Measurand Inc\ path.
 Locate the “pref_project.txt” for the project.
e. Start in:
 ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D’
 This should be the parent folder where all the previous files are located.
f. Check ‘Run Minimized’ (for it to run in the background).
5. Click ‘Apply’.
December 2014
37
Figure 4.25: Configuring a task using the LoggerNet 'Task Master' utility.
Note: The path name to the “pref_project.txt” file must be surrounded by double
quotation marks since there is a space in ‘C:\Measurand Inc\’.
6. Go To the ‘Status’ tab,
a. Verify that the ‘Pause All Tasks’ check box is unchecked, Figure 4.26.
7. SAACR_raw2data utility will run upon successful completion of a scheduled data download.
a. A progress bar will appear after a scheduled data download indicating that the
SAACR_raw2data utility is running.
38
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 4.26: Viewing the status of scheduled tasks in ‘Task Master’ utility.
If any of the files required by SAACR_raw2data are open while the program is being executed an error
message will be generated. Data which has already been automatically converted can be viewed at
any point by running SAAView (Section 7).
Note: Any of the files required by SAACR_raw2data (e.g., “Calibration” files,
“multi_saa_allcart.txt”) cannot be open while the process is running. Otherwise an error
will be generated.
It is also possible to create the “pref_project.txt” file following a manual conversion of the data. In
this case, it is necessary to collect and convert data manually at least once to create the
“pref_project.txt” file. The file is then used in ‘Task Master’ as described previously to set up
automated conversion. The procedure for automating the data conversion process in this case is:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disable scheduled data collection in the LoggerNet ‘Setup’ utility (Section 4.2.2).
Send program files (both “Main Program” and “SAA_Include”) to the CS Data Logger.
Set the path for data files in the LoggerNet ‘Setup’ utility.
Manually download the data from the logger (Section 4.2.1) and perform a manual
conversion (Section 4.2.3). This will generate the required “pref_project.txt” file.
5. Setup a new task using the ‘Task Master’ utility (previously described)
6. Manually download the data again (Section 4.2.1).
7. Enable scheduled data collection at the desired data collection interval (Section 4.2.2).
If this procedure is not followed, the risk of having data gaps is higher.
Saving Data in Overwrite File Mode
If data is to be collected over long time periods, the “SAA Data” files will eventually become very large
and require an increasing amount of time to process. Once the automated data conversion process
has been setup, it is possible to switch the ‘File Output’ Option to ‘Overwrite Existing File’ (Figure 4.27)
for the “SAA Data” files (the “PROJECT_INFO”, “SERIAL_ERRORS”, “LOGGER_DIAGNOSTICS”, and
“SAA_DIAGNOSTICS” files should NOT be changed).
December 2014
39
The SAACR_raw2data application will recognize that only the most current data is being collected.
This data will be appended to the “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file so that a complete data history is
maintained. The “multi_saa_allcart.txt” file (text file of all Cartesian coordinate records) will no longer
be updated in this mode, just the “multi_saa_curcart.txt” (text file of most recent Cartesian
coordinate records).
Figure 4.27: Switching the ‘Data File Output’ option in the LoggerNet 'Setup' utility to 'Overwrite Existing File'.
If the “SAA Data” file is viewed when ‘Overwrite File’ is implemented, only the most recent data
records will be contained in the file.
4.3 Files Created by the Logger
The following files can be expected on the logger and need to be copied/moved to the project folder.
(Note: the XX below refers to the station name of the CS Data Logger. This is set by the user in
LoggerNet Section 4.1.1.1).





XX_PROJECT_INFO.dat
o “Project Information” file summarizing the SAA serial numbers.
XX_SAA1_DATA.dat
o Data file from the first SAA, all subsequent “SAA Data” files will be similar with
sequential numbering (XX_SAAn_DATA.dat).
XX_SERIAL_ERRORS.dat
o A summary of communications and check sum errors for each record. This is present
if there are errors or not.
XX_LOGGER_DIAGNOSTICS.dat
o This file contains the voltage, and temperature data for each CS Data Logger.
XX_SAA_DIAGNOSTICS.dat
o This file contains the voltage, current and temperature data for the SAAs.
These two files will be present if one or more Measurand SAAPZ piezometers are used:
40
December 2014
SAA Software


XX_PIEZO_INFO.dat
o This file contains serial numbers for all SAAPZ’s connected to the CS Data Logger.
XX_PIEZO_DATA.dat
o This file contains the piezometer data for all the SAAPZ’s connected to the CS Data
Logger.
December 2014
41
5. SAACR_raw2data
SAACR Applications are used to enable acquisition of and convert raw data acquired from one or more
SAAs that are attached to a Campbell Scientific CR800, CR1000, or CR3000 data logger (similar to
Figure 5.1). The raw data are converted into Cartesian (x, y, z) data that can be viewed in Measurand’s
Viewer: SAAView (Section 7), or exported and sent to spreadsheets or other storage and viewing
applications.
It also converts piezometer, earth pressure cell, and strain gauge raw data for greater integration of
data sets. If this is done, then SAA and non-SAA data may be viewed together on a single graph with
a unified time base in SAAView (Section 7).
Figure 5.1: Campbell Scientific Data Logger CR1000, CR800 & CR3000.
Raw data are collected from one or more SAAs and stored on a CS Data Logger. Data files are then
retrieved from the CS Data Logger. This process is repeated as desired, each time appending a file
which holds multiple frames of raw data. The raw data are meaningless without being converted into
engineering units, using Measurand “Calibration” files and 3D algorithms.
SAACR Applications and Utilities are used to manipulate and convert raw data. The converted data
file (“multi_saa_allcart.mat”) can be opened and viewed using Measurand’s SAAView (Section 7)
viewer software.
When a subsequent data conversion is made, any new data is stored in the same file so that all the
data can be viewed as a complete series. This means the “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file grows over time.
5.1 Starting SAACR_raw2data
SAACR_raw2data application takes raw data files, usually created by a CS Data Logger, and converts
them into Cartesian data files that can be viewed in SAAView or exported to other applications.
SAACR_raw2data not only converts raw SAA data but can convert raw data for non-SAA sensors like
Piezometers, Earth Pressure Cells and Strain Gauges. When converted in SAACR_raw2data, the nonSAA sensors can be viewed in SAAView (Section 7) along with the SAA data in the same graph with a
unified time base.
42
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.2: SAACR_raw2data initial window.
5.2 “Calibration” files
“Calibration” files are required for SAACR_raw2data to work.
The default location for Measurand “*.cal” “Calibration” files is in the ‘C:\Measurand
inc\saarecorder\calibrations’ folder. Files for all production SAAs are placed there automatically
whenever SAARecorder (Section 6) is installed or updated through SAASuite (Section 2).
Manual installation of individual files is rarely required. If it is required each SAA has a “*.cal” file for
the entire SAA with the following format:
SAAF_45002_48.cal (The _48 indicates the number of segments, and is not always present;
some older SAAs may have a word or words in place of the “45022” or similar serial number).
For Model 2 SAAs there will also be one or more “subarray” files (one for every group of 8 segments
in an SAA) with the following format:
Subarray_45033.cal
Note: The first number in an SAA “*.cal” file is the same as the number in the near-most
(cable end) “subarray cal” file for that SAA.
December 2014
43
In the SAARecorder installation folder SAA “Calibration” files must be in the ‘Calibrations\Arrays’
folder and the Subarray “Calibration” files must be in the ‘Calibration\Subarrays’ folder. Each folder
can contain any number of “Calibration” files.
Note: DO NOT RENAME OR MOVE THE FOLDERS!
Additional files will be required if the following sensors are being used:




Measurand PZ1_vw or PZ1_a piezometers (“SAAPZ”).
Non-Measurand PZ3, EPC3, or SG3 vibrating wire sensors, where the “3” stands for “nonMeasurand” or “third party” sensor.
Multiple SAAs laid end-to-end (usually with some overlapping) and it is desired to form a
“virtual SAA” which acts as a single long SAA (“SuperSet SAA”).
A “Convergence” or “Looped” SAA.
The above require:
1. A “Site” calibration file describing the attached devices and any interrelationships.
2. A “non_saa_coeffs” calibration file for each non-SAA sensor (not needed for SuperSet OR
Convergence SAA) containing calibration coefficients for the non-SAA sensors.
These additional “Calibration” files can be found here:
‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site\’
‘C:\Meaurand Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\non_saa_coeffs\’
More information on “Site” files can be found in Section 5.8. Please contact Measurand (Appendix K)
if there are any issues and to ensure the correct files are obtained.
There
are
example
files
installed
automatically
at
‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAAView\logger_files\site_file_examples’ and (with installation of SAARecorder (or SAASuite)
which
is
essential
to
operation
of
SAACR_raw2data)
in
‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site’. These are very useful for practice or troubleshooting.
5.3 Files and Subfolders
It is recommended, to ensure the application easily retrieves the correct “Project” files, that the CS
Data Logger files be moved/copied to ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\[Project Name]’.
If non-Measurand piezometers (3rd party piezometers), or other non-SAA, non-Measurand sensors
are used then there must be a raw data file for each type, such as “XX_PIEZO_DATA.dat”,
“XX_EPC_DATA.dat”, etc.
44
December 2014
SAA Software
To practice using the application or to see the application working, there is an example project that
has been installed in the ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAAView\logger_files’ folder. The example folder
contains some “*.dat” files produced by a Campbell Scientific Data Logger.
PROJECT_INFO.dat File
The “XX_PROJECT_INFO.dat” file contains information on all the SAAs attached to the CS Data Logger.
Figure 5.3: An example of an “XX_PROJECT_INFO.dat” file that contains two SAAs.
SAA_DATA.dat Files
There is a data file for each SAA in the project, “XX_SAA1_DATA.dat” … “XX_SAAn_DATA.dat”. They
contain raw data which cannot be directly interpreted without being calibrated and converted by
SAACR_raw2data.
Figure 5.4: An example of an “XX_SAAn_DATA.dat” file.
December 2014
45
SERIAL_ERRORS.dat File
This file is created whether there are errors or not during the communication process between the
logger and the SAAs. Looking at Figure 5.6, row 1 is information about the CS Data Logger:
Column
Description
1
Time Stamp
2
Record Number
3
Serial Numbers (1,1)
4
Serial Number (2,1)
5
Serial Number (3,1)
6
Number of CRC Errors (1)
7
Number of CRC Errors (2)
8
Number of CRC Errors (3)
9
Number of COM Errors (1)
10
Number of COM Errors (2)
11
Number of COM Errors (3)
Row 2 to 4 are column titles for the data that follows. Column 1 is the timestamp, column 2 is the
record number (sequential), the columns after that are the serial numbers (one column per serial
number), and the following columns are for the error counts (one CRC and COM column per serial
number).
If there are numbers other than zero in any of these columns then there was an error in
communication. The CRC Error column(s) count packet errors (determined using an 8 bit sum of all
data bytes) and COM Error column(s) count communication errors. Communication errors occur when
not enough or no bytes are received.
If errors occur then the first step is to double check all connections and power sources. Ensure enough
power is getting to the SAAs, Non-SAAs and the CS Data Logger(s) and that all connections are secure
and dry. Once this is complete the logger should be run again. If there are still errors in the
“XX_SAAn_DATA.dat” file then contact Measurand for assistance (Appendix K).
46
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.5: An example of an “XX_SERIAL_ERRORS.dat” file.
Figure 5.6: The example" XX_SERIAL_ERRORS.dat" file copied into Excel.
DIAGNOSTIC Files
The “XX_SAA_DIAGNOSTIC.dat” file presents voltage (in volts), current (in mA), and temperature (in
deg C) for the SAAs connected. Each line of this file has the following information:
timestamp, record #, SAA #1 serial number, SAA #2 serial number, ..., SAA #n serial number,
SAA #1 voltage, SAA #1 current, SAA #1 temperature, SAA #2 voltage, SAA #2 current, SAA #2
temperature, ..., SAA #n voltage, SAA #n current, SAA #n temperature.
The “XX_LOGGER_DIAGNOSTIC.dat” presents voltage (in volts), and temperature (in deg C) for the CS
Data Logger. Each line of this file has the following info:
Timestamp, record #, temperature, voltage
Non-SAA Files
There can also be “non-SAA sensor” files present. These can include conventional data tables from
vibrating-wire piezometers, earth pressure cells, or strain gauges. Other “non-SAA sensor” files
December 2014
47
include those from Measurand piezometers which have a digital interface like that of the SAA. If
Measurand piezometers are present, there will be an “XX_PIEZO_INFO.dat” file and an
“XX_PIEZO_DATA.dat” data file or files (one for each COM port serving the piezometers).
For more information on non-SAA sensors see the Non-SAA Sensors Section 5.9 or
SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration Tab Section 3.2 on automating conversion.
Export Files
The default export type is “DIY” (Do-it yourself), these files can be configured by the user to include
data in various formats. The base export is the “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file holding converted
Cartesian data, it is always created and found in the project folder. This file is viewable in SAAView
(Section 7) and useable in Matlab.
If the default DIY type folder is selected for export then all exports will appear in a DIY subfolder. If
older legacy formats are selected, they will appear in the project folder or in auto-named folders like
“Atlas”.
5.3.6.1 DIY Subfolder
DIY Subfolders are created after file conversion in conjunction with requested converted files to ease
the process of using converted data wherever the user prefers. The subfolder holds two or more files
depending on the number of SAAs. There is a text file, “saa_export_info.txt” that provides the settings
from the last conversion as well as export format definitions. The other file(s) are titled using the SAA
type (SAAF, SAAScan…), the calibration file number, the number of segments (not always included)
and the segment size (SAAF_46528_60_500.dat). These files are comma delimited text files that can
be opened in any text reading software.
Figure 5.7: Common ‘DIY’ folder contents.
48
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.8: A view of the “saa_export_info.txt” file in the ‘DIY’ folder.
5.3.6.2 Archive Subfolder
Every time SAACR_raw2data runs, it creates a “Binary” file called multi_saa_allcart.mat, containing
the Cartesian data.
To avoid long processing times for SAACR_raw2data, an “Archive” file for previously-converted data
can be created. An “Archive” file is the above “Binary” file, renamed to
“multi_saa_allcart_archive.mat”, and placed in a subfolder of the ‘Project’ folder, named “Archive”.
Whenever SAACR_raw2data runs, it will look for the “multi_saa_allcart_archive.mat” file. If it finds
the “Archive” file, it will convert any new raw data and concatenate it to the “Archive” file. It will
then place the result in the project folder as a new multi_saa_allcart.mat, with all available data.
This means that the application needs only new raw data, and the “Archive” file, to run. The
conversion and concatenation will happen in both ‘OK (Auto)’ and ‘Reset’ opening modes.
The “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file will eventually grow again, in which case the
“multi_saa_allcart_archive.mat” file can be replaced again by renaming and moving the
“multi_saa_allcart.mat” file. This can be done any number of times. It is prudent to first save all the
files into a backup folder in case mistakes are made.
Note that ‘OK (Auto)’ only does something if there really is new raw data.
December 2014
49
5.4 Utilities
Various utility programs are installed with SAACR_raw2data and can be accessed in SAASuite (Section
2). They are included in this manual and are located in Appendix A.




SAACR_raw2raw_concat: concatenates raw data files (SAA or non-SAA), Appendix A.1.
SAACR_cart2cart: concatenates two or more Cartesian “SAA Data” files, Appendix A.2.
SAACR_cart2cart_matchup: concatenates two data files (SAA or non-SAA) including when the
sensors have been moved, added, or deleted so the data are “unmatched”, Appendix A.3.
SAACR_cart2manycart: breaks up a “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file into one file per SAA,
Appendix A.4.
5.5 Getting Started
Note: Hovering the mouse over most of the controls will cause a definition of the control to
appear.
The SAACR_raw2data application can be started by one of the following options:
1. Clicking on the desktop icon for SAASuite then clicking on the ‘SAACR_raw2data’ button.
2. Running SAACR_raw2data.exe directly from its installation folder, “C:\Measurand
Inc\SAA3D”.
The window in Figure 5.9 opens and three options are available:
1. Click Reset’
 Is used for initial setup and troubleshooting. This mode enables file selection and
settings. It behaves as though no conversions have previously been performed.
Therefore any existing converted data will be over-written, and all raw data (old or
new) will be converted.
2. Click OK (Auto)
 Use AFTER an initial conversion using ‘Reset’. ‘OK (Auto)’ mimics the behavior of
the application when running automatically, such as from a command-line call
from LoggerNet Software. (If ‘Reset’ was NOT used before on the current data
then ‘OK (Auto)’ will behave like ‘Reset’). When called from the command-line
(Section 5.5.4) the application willrun without interruption and will provide
feedback to the user through a “Log” file “saacr_raw2data_logfile.txt”, but not
reviewable on the ‘Main View’ window. In contrast, the ‘Reset’ or ‘OK (Auto)’
mode, through SAACR_raw2data, provides a reviewable record of operations on
the ‘Main View’ window and in “saacr_raw2data_logfile.txt” showing the same
thing.
3. Click Quit
 To close SAACR_raw2data.
50
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.9: ‘Startup’ window with three options.
Logger Raw Data File Window
To begin a new project, or to troubleshoot or make new settings to an existing project use the ‘Reset’
button to open the “Logger Raw Data File”. ‘OK (Auto)’ button is for use after the project is set up, to
confirm automatic (Auto) behavior consistent with a command-line call from LoggerNet.
By clicking the ‘Reset’ button the ‘Logger Raw Data File’ window will open, shown in Figure 5.10. This
window should be clear unless previously used. If previously used, the last project run will appear.
Figure 5.10: ‘Logger Raw Data File’ window.
5.5.1.1 Selecting a Project - Reset
If the ‘Logger Raw Data File’ window is blank OR the files listed are not the current project then click
the ‘New Project’ button. This opens a file browser where the current project can be selected. Browse
to the “Project” file (found in “C:\measurand inc\saa3d\logger files”) and click on any file in the project
folder.
When naming a project be clear and distinct to avoid confusion with other projects.
December 2014
51
5.5.1.2 Selecting Files - Reset
This is the first conversion therefore three things need to be done here:
1. Select a project.
2. Select data.
3. Are there non-SAA sensors or a SuperSet (two or more SAAs to be made into one longer
SAA)? If so, add a “Site” file (Section 5.8).
In most cases a project folder can be selected containing the files, and SAACR_raw2data will automate
the rest of the process by assigning the files to “Types” including raw data files and a “project_info”
file. Unusual file names can lead to improper selection, so it is recommended that the results are
checked.
SAACR_raw2data will remember the selections and apply them automatically during the next
conversion.
The next conversion will be performed on files with the same names, acquired since the first
conversion. SAACR_raw2data will concatenate new data onto old data, saving a record of all
converted data.
If this is a first time use, the file selection dialog will be blank as seen in Figure 5.11.
Click on ‘New Project’ at the top of the window, select the “example” folder, as seen in Figure 5.12,
and then any file in that folder.
Figure 5.11: First time use ‘New Project’, only one select file window will open at a time.
52
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.12: The example folder that can be found in ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\’.
Figure 5.13: This is what the ‘Example’ project folder looks like, the “Errors” file will be ignored.
SAACR_raw2data will select the files it needs and assign them a “type”. In this case SAACR_raw2data
detected more than one SAA so has highlighted the ‘Browse’ and ‘Info’ buttons associated with
selection of a “Site” file. A “Site” file is only needed if a “SuperSet SAA” or a “Convergence SAA” (see
Section 5.8) is being formed or there are non-SAA sensors present (see Section 5.9). The ‘Info’
button provides details on “Site” files, also see Section 5.8.
Figure 5.14: The ‘File Selection’ window displaying the files from the ‘Example’ folder.
Note: The ‘info’ and ‘Browse’ buttons for the “Site” file at the bottom right of the window
turn yellow when a “Site” file is required.
SAACR_raw2data assigns file types based on the project and data file names. Default names contain
“PROJECT_INFO” for “Project” files and “SAA#_DATA” for SAA raw data files (where # is the number
of the SAA, such as 1, 2, etc.). If these file names are too creative, SAACR_raw2data may fail to assign
December 2014
53
types properly. So, it is important to review the files and their types! This shouldn’t be a problem if
the files were created using a logger program created using SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.1).
If SAACR_raw2data did not correctly choose files or file types there are ‘Clear’ and ‘Browse’ buttons
available to make corrections manually.
Once the file and type selections are completed click ‘OK’



The files and type selections will not have to be checked again.
A re-start of SAACR_raw2data will present the list of files and types used in the latest
completed conversion.
The ‘New Project’ button is used to select a different project previously saved and will
automatically load that project’s files and types.
“Calibration” files
If the “Calibration” files are not present a prompt will appear requesting them. To retrieve them,
download the “Calibration” files directly from SAASuite (see Section 2.1.3) or download and install
the most recent versions of SAASuite and SAARecorder (Section 1.2). SAASuite will place the
“Calibration” files where SAACR_raw2data can find them.
Selecting Settings
A “Settings” window will appear mid-way through the conversion, after calibration and data files have
been examined for content.
The settings must match the physical state of the SAA or the conversion will be incorrect!
Each SAA, if not convergence (XZ Section), is either near-vertical (3D calculations) or near-horizontal
(2D calculations). Convergence SAAs do not use the ‘Vertical’ checkbox. The reference location for
each SAA is either at the far end (lowest point for vertical SAA) or near end (the cable end, top for
vertical SAA).
Figure 5.15: The ‘Settings’ window.
The ‘Settings’ window will appear similar to Figure 5.15. Follow the subsequent steps to complete the
settings setup:
1. Sernum:
 (Read only) is the list of all the SAA Serial Numbers in the files selected.
2. Vertical:
54
December 2014
SAA Software

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check if the SAA is within 60 degrees of vertical, rather than mostly horizontal. If
“Site” file indicates an “XZ Section” (convergence shape), then ‘XZSect’ text
appears.
Ref=far:
 Check if the data are to be calculated from the FAR end (cable is at NEAR end).
Az, deg:
 Enter any desired Azimuth (Heading) offset (degrees, clockwise is positive) for each
SAA.
NumSeg:
 The number of segments in the SAA.
StartSeg:
 Segment = 1 at cable (near) end. If a number larger than 1 is entered then all
previous segments will be ignored.
EndSeg:
 Default: EndSeg = NumSeg. If a number smaller than the total number of segments
is entered than all segments after will be ignored.
SlavedSeg:
 Use ‘Edit Slaved’ button to enter any desired Slaved Segments (slaved segments
will be assigned the tilt of the previous segment in order of calculation).
 Note that although the assignment of tilt is always in the order of calculation, 1 is
always the NEAR (Cable) end. For example, if the reference end is the non-cable
end, and 1 is selected for slaving, then the segment nearest the cable (1) will be
assigned the tilt of segment 2.
 If the far most segment is slaved and the reference is at the far end, there is no
‘previous’ segment. In this case the tilt of the nearest non-slaved segment will be
assigned.
Note: Although the assignment of tilt is always in order of calculation, 1 is always the
NEAR (cable) end.
9. Edit Slaved Button:
 Click to select which segments to Slave. Figure 5.16 will appear with the SAA Serial
Number and selection box for each individual segment where 1 = cable end.
10. Export Format Button:
 Select an ASCII or MATLAB export format (see Sections 5.5.3.1 & Appendix H.1). A
“DIY” format is recommended over “legacy” formats.
11. UTC Offset, Hours:
 Offset from CS Data Logger clock in hours. This is optional.
12. **Advanced (mag) Button:
 Saves and displays a file of magnetometer data, if the SAA is equipped with
magnetometers.
 On first conversions, the user must choose “quiet” mag data to use for azimuth
corrections.
December 2014
55

The mag data selection on the first conversion is used on all subsequent
conversions. This is to avoid problems from magnetic fluctuations such as from
passing vehicles or equipment.
Note: If the SAA is equipped with magnetometers, an additional button called ‘Advanced
(mag)’ will appear. See Section 5.7.
Figure 5.16: ‘Editing Slaved Segments’ for SAA with Serial Number 45821.
Note: There is no longer a checkbox for export mode. ‘Export Format’ button raises an
export dialog with “DIY” formats as the default.
To select the export formats click the ‘Export Format’ button, this opens a new window. The following
is a listing of available formats and what they are.
56
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.17: ‘Export Format’ window.
5.5.3.1 Current Export Formats and Data Types
De-select the ‘Use a Legacy Format’ check box. Check it only if an older format is being maintained.
Select the option(s) that best suit the available viewer. One to several Types can be selected keeping
in mind that the more Types selected, the larger the files will be.
Types of Data:





XYZ:
o
o
Cumulative Deviation (absolute position)
The absolute shape: XYZ positions of vertices, without any reference subtracted. Z
represents the absolute SAA vertex positions in the vertical dimension. It is not a path
length.
diff (XY), Z:
o Incremental Deviation (expected by VDV)
o The difference in X and Y position between two ends of each segment, without any
reference subtracted.
Accelerations
o (accelX, accelY, accelZ)
o The accelerations in segment local XYZ coordinates. Note that here, the third variable
is an acceleration not a distance along the Z axis.
Curvature
o dtheta/ds where dtheta is the change in angle per segment, ds is the segment length.
Temperature
o The temperature in each segment (NaN if no temperature sensor in that segment).
December 2014
57
5.5.3.2 DIY Format Definitions
One file per SAA will be created. Select types of data to export either in ASCII “*.dat” or MATLAB
“*.mat” format. All selected ASCII types appear in the same “*.dat” file row per timestamp in the
order of this dialog (MATLAB format is a binary structure). Z data (unless accelZ) will appear only once
per row.
Formats:










58
ASCII “*.dat” file
o Export a “.dat” file.
MATLAB “*.mat” file
o Export a “.mat” file.
Metric Units
o Millimeter lateral, Meter axial, Degrees Celsius.
Imperial Units
o Inches lateral, Feet axial, Degrees Fahrenheit.
All Data
o All data for all time will be exported, including any new data.
New Data Only
o Any new (not exported before) data will be exported and must be retrieved before
the next export.
Unique Stamped Files
o ASCII files will not over-write existing files and their filenames will include a unique
PC timestamp.
Raw Filenames
o Each ASCII filename will include the name of the raw data file associated with that
SAA, instead of the serial number for that SAA. IF ‘Unique Stamped Files’ is not
selected, the export files can have the same names as the raw data files. They will be
in the ‘DIY’ folder.
Chunk the Files
o Data files will be limited to 500 frames each, each nth file will have a “_n” suffix. As
each chunk is filled, a new chunk file will appear.
Use a Header (Mandatory for VDV)
o Include a DAT-style header in ASCII “*.dat” files.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.18: ‘Export format’ window for ‘Legacy’ formats.
Progress and results can be viewed in the SAACR_raw2data progress window, see Figure 5.19 .
Figure 5.19: SAACR_raw2data ‘Progress’ window.
Command-Line Operation
To convert files automatically, a program can be written that calls SAACR_raw2data with a filename
argument. The argument is the full-path filename of the “pref_project.txt” file, e.g.
Saacr_raw2data.exe “C:\measurand inc\saaview\logger_files\example\pref_project.txt”
Before using this command-line call the “pref_project.txt” file must be created. There are two ways
to generate the “pref_project.txt” file:
1. Run SAACR_raw2data manually once.
December 2014
59

During the first run using the ‘Reset’ option, details can be changed or added such
as DIY export format or changing the reference end of an SAA.
2. Run SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.2)
 If no raw data files are available this is the only way to generate a “pref_project.txt”
file for the command-line operation. Note that SAACR_FileGenerator Tab will
produce a basic “pref_project.txt” file sufficient for SAACR_raw2data to run. During
a first run using the ‘Reset’ option details can be changed or added such as changing
the reference end of an SAA.
 Refer to Section 4.2.4 (Automated Data Conversions) for using the Task Master
utility of LoggerNet to call SAACR_raw2data automatically.
Note: The “pref_project.txt” file is only required to run the command-line operation but it
is not required to run SAACR_raw2data.
5.6 Reviewing the Files
SAACR_raw2data will have left up to five files in the project folder (possibly more for a new
“server_mat” export option) and the DIY folder (Section 5.3.6.1).
File descriptions:





60
multi_saa_allcart.mat
o MATLAB concatenated Cartesian data.
o Always contains all converted data. It is the source for any selected formatted ASCII
“*.txt” files.
pref_project.txt
o Settings and other project specific information, used by SAACR_raw2data.
file_setup.mat
o A list of files used for this conversion.
settings_reload.mat
o Tells SAACR_raw2data which project to reload on start-up and project information.
saacr_raw2data_logfile.txt
o Stores all data that was available in the ‘Progress’ window during the conversion.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.20: A view of the "saacr_raw2data_logfile.txt" which is a record of the ‘Progress’ window, see Figure 5.19
Note: Except when using some special MATLAB only exports, MATLAB current Cartesian
data files (“multi_saa_curcart.mat”) are no longer formed. Instead, pointers keep track of
current and older data in “multi_saa_allcart.mat”.
Formation of files depends on CS Data Logger settings.
Figure 5.21: Most common files left by raw2data in the ‘Project’ folder.
Cartesian data formats can vary, depending on selection
Please examine the file and get familiar with its contents, Figure 5.22 is a good example.
December 2014
61
Figure 5.22: A typical DIY data file, ‘SAAF_45821_60_500.dat’, copied into Excel.
Viewing the Data
The “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file is viewable in the SAAView application. (Section 7).
5.7 Magnetometers
Some SAAs contain magnetometer(s), to determine the direction of the earth’s magnetic field. The
magnitude of the Earth’s magnetic field is normalized to be 1.0 at Measurand’s factory location in
New Brunswick, Canada.
Magnetometers in SAAs
Some SAAs are equipped with magnetometers (mags), upon request. These are used in vertical SAAs
to:


Automatically make the XY data relative to magnetic north, regardless of the direction of the
X-mark on the SAA.
Correct any twist between magnetometers, using interpolation; and beyond the top
magnetometer, using extrapolation.
The user selects a set of magnetometer data to use for the above purposes, and may “turn off” any
magnetometer that shows evidence of being influenced by external fields (such as from buried ferrous
metal). The set of magnetometer data used is a user selected frame or an average of many frames
also user selected, and all magnetometers can be used. Once magnetometer settings have been made
by the user, the same set of data is used automatically in all subsequent conversions.
First Conversion Setup
If magnetometers are used in any SAA attached to a CS Data Logger, SAACR_raw2data will
automatically guide the user through setup steps on the first conversion.
62
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.23: This “test” project includes one SAA two with magnetometers.
1. For help starting from the beginning go to Section 5.5.3.
2. The “Settings” window, seen in Figure 5.24, shows the ‘Advanced (mag)’ button.
 This is only to be used for the first run, click this button.
Figure 5.24: The ‘Settings’ window with the ‘Advanced (mag)’ button.
3. The ‘Advanced (mag)’ button should be ignored on all subsequent runs.
4. The notice in Figure 5.25 will appear.
Figure 5.25: The notice appears on the first run through SAACR_raw2data when a mag is present.
5. The user will be asked to save magnetometer data in the “magdata” subfolder (automatically
created in the project folder) see Figure 5.26.
o It is saved as “magdata.mat” as seen in Figure 5.27. At this point it is best to use this
default format.
December 2014
63
Figure 5.26: The ‘magdata’ subfolder automatically created in the ‘Project’ folder.
6. Click ‘Save’.
7. The user will be asked to select a “magdata.mat” (or other user-named “Magdata” file) in the
same folder, select it (see Figure 5.26).
 It should be the file created in the previous step.
Figure 5.27: The “magdata.mat” file to be saved in the ‘magdata’ subfolder.
8. Click ‘Open’.
9. A message similar to Figure 5.28 will appear.
 It is recommended that the ‘Specific Settings’ button be clicked.
Figure 5.28: The ‘Choose Mode’ window that appears.
10. SAACR_magtool will open, see Figure 5.29, and will show changes in the magnetometer headings
over time.
 Make all desired alterations using the following information:
64
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.29: The ‘Initial’ window of the ‘Magtool’.



Legend
o A list of the Magnetometers within the selected SAA and their location; top, middle,
bottom.
‘az’ Button - SAACR_raw2data opens in “az” (azimuth, or headings) mode. The object is to select
headings that are not influenced by some disturbance, such as a large vehicle parked near the
SAA. In “az” mode, the vertical dashed line is controlled by the right mouse button. Date and time
are read out at the top of the line.
o One per SAA.
o Displays the change in Azimuth per mag for the selected SAA.
Dashed Line on ‘az’ Graph
o Only available when ‘az’ is clicked. Figure 5.30
o Drag the dashed line to where there is a quiet time,
 Right-click the dashed line to select the quiet mag time by clicking ‘Select This
Time’.
 The ‘az’ button turns green indicating that the selection process is complete.
December 2014
65
Figure 5.30: The menu that appears upon right-clicking the mouse on the dashed line.


‘tot’ Button - Select the ‘tot’ button. The magnitude of the magnetic field at each mag of an SAA
will be shown, for all times. The vertical line (now dotted) is still available, but is not used to make
selections. By selecting any mag line with the right mouse button the user can turn off that mag
if desired, see Figure 5.32.
o One per SAA.
o Displays total magnitude per mag for selected SAA.
Mag Lines on ‘tot’ Graph
o Only clickable when ‘tot’ is clicked. Figure 5.31
o Right-click a colored mag line to turn it off or on,
 The mag that is turned off becomes a dashed line indicating that it is off.
 To turn a mag back on, right-click the dashed-line and select ‘Cancel/Restore’.
Figure 5.31: The ‘Magtool’ with the ‘tot’ button selected.
Figure 5.32: The menu available by right-clicking the mouse over a mag line while in ‘tot’ mode.


66
AutoScale / DefaultScale
o Clicking this tab switches between the two options.
Mags Off / Mags On
o This tab allows the user to turn off all Magnetometers.
December 2014
SAA Software

OK Button
o Click when selections are complete to continue.
Note: Hovering the mouse over most of the controls will cause a definition of the control to
appear.
11. Repeat this process with all the SAAs.
12. Click ‘OK’.
Note: the magnitude of the magnetic field is different for different geographic locations.
Values seen in the graph should be assessed according to the local expected field, which
can be found by searching the internet.
13. A notice (see Figure 5.33) will show that:
 A “roll_corrections.txt” file has been saved.
 This is the file used by SAACR_raw2data to make corrections to all subsequent
raw data.
 A “headings.txt” file will also be saved.
 It can be used to review magnetometer data in more detail.
14. Click ‘OK’.
Figure 5.33: A notice announcing that a “roll_calibration.txt” file has been created and saved.
15. Another notice (see Figure 5.34) will appear to remind the user to run SAACR_raw2data again to
apply the magnetometer corrections.
 The next time that SAACR_raw2data is run, the user must click the ‘RESET’ button on
startup.
 Thereafter, when they are converting additional data, they can click the ‘OK’ button to
convert any new data.
16. Click ‘OK’.
December 2014
67
Figure 5.34: A reminder to run SAACR_raw2data over again to apply the magnetometer corrections. The next time that
SAACR_raw2data is run, the user must click the ‘RESET’ button on startup. Thereafter, when they are converting
additional data, they can click the ‘OK’ button to convert any new data.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Close SAACR_raw2data and re-open it.
Click ‘Reset’.
Choose the current project and click ‘OK’.
For assistance with this process as there will be no Mag data requests, go to Section 5.5.3.
5.8 “Site” Files
“Site” files are required when using Superset SAAs, Convergence SAAs and/or non-SAA sensors. “Site”
files can normally be found in ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site\’. If a “Site” file is not
available one can be created by the user using a notepad program, an example “Site” file and
knowledge of the non-SAAs. Otherwise contact Measurand for assistance (Appendix K).
There can be only one “Site” file for a project. All “Site” file fields can appear in a single “Site” file. For
instance, a “Site” file might configure a superset SAA and three piezometers.
Superset SAAs
Multiple SAAs may be associated to make one longer SAA: a “Super-SAA” or “SuperSet SAA”. The
individual SAAs must be laid end-to-end, and normally are overlapping by one or two segments, and
tied together mechanically.
The association is done in a “Site” file. The following Figure 5.35 is the “Site” file for a SuperSet SAA.
The Super-SAA is defined pair-wise. Since it is possible, particularly for horizontal SAAs, that some
might be turned around end-to-end, the definition includes “far_ref”, which means “referenced to
the far end”. “Total Extents” are the beginning and ending segments that are to be included in the
Super-SAA. Overlaps define the segments that are common between the two SAAs in a pair.
68
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.35: “Site” file for a SuperSet SAA.
Note: It is possible for an SAA to overlap and then “keep going” but the part beyond the
overlap can be “ignored” by manipulating the “total_extents” entries.
“Site” files for Super-SAAs are the same “Site” files used to define non-SAA sensors. If a project
includes Super-SAAs and non-SAA sensors, a single “Site” file is used, with fields for each purpose.
Super-SAAs will appear in SAAView along with individual SAAs. For instance, if there are five SAAs
combined into one Super-SAA, SAAView will show the five, plus one additional Super-SAA (autolabeled as such).
Convergence SAAs
“Convergence” SAAs include both horizontal and vertical portions. Typically these travel in a “loop”
around part or all of the circumference of a tunnel. They must be converted using special
mathematics. This is accomplished by selecting a “Site” file created for the purpose, near the bottom
of the ‘File Selection’ window. It is MANDATORY that Version 5.70 or higher of SAARecorder be
installed since SAARecorder is involved automatically in the conversion process.
December 2014
69
The “Site” file for two Convergence SAAs (also called “Section” or “Loop”) is shown in Figure 5.36 and
is installed automatically at 'C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\site_file_examples’. Read the
description at the top and then edit this example file to suit the number of Convergence-SAAs. Once
it has been edited for the setup, it should be copied to ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site’.
Figure 5.36: “Site” file for a Convergence SAA.
Also
in
‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\site_file_examples’,
“site_convergence_xz_section_51796.cal” can be found, which if moved to ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site’,
will
serve
for
the
example
project
folder
“loop_example_top_out_right_in”, found in ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\’. These example
files are automatically installed for “practice” conversions and viewing of “Convergence-SAA” data.
5.9 Non-SAA Sensors
Non-SAA Sensors include Piezometers (PZs), Earth Pressure Cells (EPCs) and Strain Gauges (SGs). If
any of these sensors are attached to the CS Data Logger they can be included in Measurand data sets
by including them in the SAACR_raw2data conversion process.
All non-SAA sensors require a common “Site” file and an individual “non_saa_coeffs” calibration file,
one per sensor. The default locations for these are:
‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site\’
‘C:\Meaurand Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\non_saa_coeffs\’
70
December 2014
SAA Software
Note: Don’t forget to include the “Site” file before running SAACR_raw2data when there
are non-SAAs present.
Piezometer (PZ)
Piezometers (PZ) sensors can be of three general types:
PZ3:
These are conventional vibrating-wire (VW) piezometers, using a conventional VW interface to the CS
Data Logger. The “3” indicates they are “third-party”, or “non-Measurand” sensors. The CS Data
Logger program creates a raw data table of “digits” and temperatures.
The “Site” file designates which columns of the data table are to be used in the conversion to pressure,
and what the units shall be. It also contains other site-specific data such as elevations, depths, latitude
and longitude. The “non_saa_coeffs” files contain the calibration constants of the sensors.
PZ1_a:
These are legacy Measurand piezometers used in one development project.
PZ1_vw (SAAPZ):
These are conventional VW piezometers fitted with a Measurand microprocessor-based interface at
the sensor. The microprocessor converts the VW frequency to digital. Digital data enter the CS Data
Logger through a Measurand SAA232 or SAA232-5 interface. The CS Data Logger creates a
“*PZ_INFO*.dat” file containing the serial numbers of the PZ1_vw microprocessors. It also creates a
raw data file containing the digital data and temperatures from digital temperature sensors in the PZlocal microprocessor.
The “Site” and “non_saa_coeffs” files are the same as for PZ3 (above). Because the data handling and
cabling can be very similar to that of an SAA, PZ1_a and PZ1_vw sensors are sometimes called “SAAP”.
The three types of Piezometer all look similar (Figure 5.37 shows a PZ1_vw) except that the PZ3 does
not have a microprocessor-based interface
December 2014
71
Figure 5.37: PZ1_vw sensor mounted to 27 mm ID PVC conduit (SAA inside). The VW piezometer (made by Geokon) is on
the left and the Measurand microprocessor-based interface is on the right.
The following is a breakdown of a “Site” file using Figure 5.38 as an example:










72
cr_sernum
o The serial number of the CS Data Logger. Essential to prevent misuse of this file with
other sets of sensors. The serial number can be found on the data logger.
num
o The number of PZ3 sensors attached.
data_format
o The format in which the data is in.
raw2engr_cols
o The columns in the data table to use for conversion to pressures.
raw2engr_polynomial_calc:
o 1 for polynomial calculation; 0 for linear already in data file.
raw2tempc_cols:
o The columns in the data table to use for conversions to temperatures.
raw2tempc_polynomial_calc:
o 1 for polynomial calculation; 0 for linear already in data file.
raw2tempc_Coefficients_abc:
o Temperature coefficients for thermistors.
p_raw_units:
o These can be digits, frequency, degrees Celsius or resist.
t_raw_units:
December 2014
SAA Software





o These can be digits, frequency, degrees Celsius or resist.
[pz3_01]:
o The first piezometer (order must match the column order of the data table).
serialnumber:
o Mandatory so SAACR_raw2data can find the corresponding “non_saa_coeffs.cal” file.
label, latitude, longitude, notes:
o Not essential.
elev_m:
o May be needed, depending on data format.
elev_offset_m:
o Essential.
In Figure 5.38, under [pz3] num listed “5”, therefore 5 PZ3s will be listed [pz3_01] through [pz3_05].
Figure 5.38: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes 5 PZ3 sensors.
December 2014
73
Figure 5.39: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes 7 PZ1_vw sensors.
Figure 5.39 is almost identical to Figure 5.40 except that “cr_sernum” is not shown. The
“*project_info*.dat” file and “pz_data” files, along with the unique serial numbers built into PZ1
interfaces, ensure that the “Site” file cannot be used with unintended sensors.
74
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.40: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes 7 PZ1_a sensors.
The “Site” file in Figure 5.40 does not include any column definitions like in Figure 5.38. This is because
PZ1_a and PZ1_vw sensors have microprocessors with unique addresses, they have a “piezo_info” file
that lists the serial numbers and one data table per serial port. Each serial port can have more than
one sensor attached through an SAA232 or SAA232-5 interface.
December 2014
75
Figure 5.41: The “piezo_info” file for PZ1_a sensors from Figure 5.40.
The “piezo_info” file for PZ1_a or PZ1_vw sensors is similar to the “project_info” file for SAAs. It
defines the grouping of PZ1_a serial numbers by serial port. The serial number lists are padded with
zeroes so that each port has the same number of columns.
Figure 5.42: Data table for one of the ports handling three PZ1_a sensors.
Temperatures in Figure 5.42 are from a digital sensor and are reported directly as degrees Celsius.
76
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.43: ‘Progress’ window showing the PZ1_a serial numbers reported by SAACR_raw2data during conversion. They
match those of the “piezo_info.dat” file.
Figure 5.44: PZ1_a data appears in “pz1_data.txt” in the ‘Project’ folder.
Note: When converting, additional information appears in the SAACR_raw2data ‘Progress’
window and is logged in “saacr_raw2data logfile.txt”.
December 2014
77
Figure 5.45: Example of a “Site” file with PZ1_a sensors being used with SAAs and “piezo_data.dat” files in
SAACR_raw2data.
Figure 5.46: ‘Project’ folder for Figure 5.45.
78
December 2014
SAA Software
There are 9 SAAs and three ports in Figure 5.46 each handling multiple PZ1_a’s (total of 7). Each port
has a “piezo#_data.dat” files associated with it. The “diagnostics” and “serial _errors” files are not
used by SAACR_raw2data.
Figure 5.47: Example of a CS Data Logger data table from PZ3 sensors.
In Figure 5.47 there are five PZ3s (columns 3 - 7) and five thermistor temperatures (already converted
by the CS Data Logger, columns 8 - 12). The column contents are defined in the “Site” file. The
conversion method for temperature (none) is also defined in the “Site” file.
Earth Pressure Cells (EPCs) & Strain Gauges (SGs)
Earth Pressure Cells (EPCs) and Strain Gauges (SGs) are handled almost the same as PZ3 sensors. These
are conventional vibrating-wire (VW) sensors, using a conventional VW interface to the CS Data
Logger. The CS Data Logger program creates a raw data table of “digits” and temperatures.
The “Site” file designates which columns of the data table are to be used in the conversion to
engineering units, and what the units shall be. It also contains other site-specific data such as
elevations, depths, latitude and longitude. The “non_saa_coeffs” files contain the calibration
constants of the sensors.
In keeping with the PZ3, PZ1_a and PZ1_vw nomenclature, these sensors are called “EPC3” and “SG3”
non-SAA sensors.
December 2014
79
Figure 5.48: Excerpt from a “’Site” file which includes EPC3 sensors
Figure 5.49: Excerpt from a “Site” file which includes SG3 sensors.
“non_saa_coeffs.cal” File
The “non_saa_coeffs” cal file is the same for any of the non-SAA sensors (PZ1, PZ3, EPC, SG).
The serial number in the file is assigned by the manufacturer (Measurand or third party) and must
match the serial number entry for that sensor in the “Site” file. Also, the [psi] field is never used by
SAACR_raw2data, so can be left blank.
80
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 5.50: A “non_saa_coeffs.cal” file for an EPC3 sensor (seen in Figure 5.48).
Figure 5.51: A “non_saa_coeffs.cal” file for an SG3 sensor (seen in Figure 5.49).
December 2014
81
6. SAARecorder
SAARecorder is the Measurand PC software used to view and record data from ShapeAccelArrays
(SAAs). SAA shape, motion, and accelerations can be viewed numerically or in graphical format in realtime. SAARecorder can save data from SAAs in either raw binary format, or a variety of different text
formats. It can also export saved raw data to Measurand's SAAView application (Section 7). A number
of diagnostic functions are provided within SAARecorder to verify correct functioning of any
connected SAAs.
6.1 Connecting Hardware
Note: If an older system is being used with a separate Ethernet data concentrator, then
please refer instead to the instructions found in Appendix C for connecting hardware.
At any time during the connection process (‘Connect SAA’) the user can save or open a configuration.
On the left of the ‘Connect SAA’ window, under all tabs, are configuration buttons.




New Configuration Button
o Clicking this button clears all previously made selections in the ‘Connection’ window.
Open Configuration Button
o An ‘Open File’ window allowing the user to select a previously saved configuration.
Save and Exit Button
o A ‘Save File’ window opens allowing the user to name and save the current
connection selections and then closes SAARecorder.
*_[serial number].txt Button
o All recently saved configuration files are listed as buttons under the ‘New
Configuration’ Button.
Figure 6.1: The ‘Configuration’ buttons on the left of the ‘Connect SAA’ window.
Also, under the ‘Test’ tab is a ‘Save and Continue’ button, see Figure 6.16.
82
December 2014
SAA Software

Save and Continue Button
o A ‘Save File’ window opens allowing the user to name and save the current
connection selections and then opens SAARecorder.
Connect SAA
1. Start SAARecorder application to collect data.
 Once the application starts trying to communicate with the SAA, the red LED on the
SAA232 should light up and the red & green lights on the USB will light up as well.
2. The ‘Startup’ window will appear (Figure 6.2)
Figure 6.2: The ‘Startup’ window. This window appears once SAARecorder has been initialized.
3. Click ‘Connect SAA’.
Connecting using the SAAFPU
Single SAAs or an SAAPZ can be connected to Measurand’s SAA Field Power Unit (SAAFPU) shown in
Figure 6.3. The SAAFPU is a portable unit designed for collecting SAA data manually in either the field
or in the office. It serves as a portable interface between one SAA and a PC running the SAARecorder
application, or between one SAA and an Android device running the SAADroid application.
Figure 6.3: SAA Field Power Unit (SAAFPU) in center.
December 2014
83
Figure 6.4: Model 003 SAA Field Power Unit Interface. (A) 4-pin circular connector wiring design, N.B. The physical
connector is external (not shown here) located on the left side of the SAAFPU, (B) 5-pin terminal block, (C) Battery
charge level meter, (D) Auxiliary 4-pin terminal block.
Power to the SAA is controlled via SAARecorder or SAADroid. Therefore the following steps should be
taken when using the SAAFPU with an SAA or SAAPZ:
1. Connect the SAA or SAAPZ to the SAAFPU with either the 4-pin circular connector or the 5-pin
terminal block. (See Figure 6.4 A & B).
Note: Only one SAA or daisy chained SAA/SAAPZ can be connected to the SAAFPU at one
time. Two or more SAAs CANNOT be connected to the SAAFPU at one time!
2. To connect the SAA or SAAPZ to the green 5-pin connector, the wiring is as follows:
Pin 1: White SAA cable (RS485 A)
Pin 2: Blue SAA cable (RS485 B)
Pin 3: Red SAA cable (+12 V to SAA)
Pin 4: Black SAA cable (GND)
Pin 5: Shield
84
December 2014
SAA Software
Note: If an older SAA is being used, the wiring may use different colors for the RS485 A and
B communications wires, please check with Measurand if the user is unsure how to connect
these wires.
3. There are two methods to connect the SAAFPU to a PC running SAARecorder:
a. Connecting the SAAFPU directly to a PC:
 Connect the serial to USB cable provided with the SAAFPU (shown on the right in
Figure 6.3) to the serial cable on the front facing plate of the SAAFPU. Once this
is done, plug the USB connector into a USB port on the PC.
 The serial connection does not have any screws because it is meant to act as a
quick release point in case the cable is snagged or the SAAFPU falls.
b. Connecting the SAAFPU wirelessly to a PC:
 The SAAFPU comes equipped with a set of two wireless adapters (shown on the
left in Figure 6.3).
 One adapter in the pair is equipped with a 9-pin connector and connects to the
serial cable on the front facing plate of the SAAFPU.
 The other adapter is equipped with a USB plug to connect to a PC.
 These two adapters are "paired" and programmed at the factory and require no
user setup. To the PC these adapters look the same as the directly connected
cable.
 A new serial COM port will be installed the first time the SAAFPU is connected to
a PC using the wireless pair. The communication range of the wireless pair is
approximately 20 m.
4. Click the 'SAAFPU' choice under the 'Connection' tab, the window should appear as it is in Figure
6.5. Click the Serial Port that the SAA(s) is/are connected to.
a. Click 'Next' or the ‘Search’ tab. The ‘Search’ tab can be used to automatically detect
SAAs on individual COM ports.
b. If it is necessary to manually add certain devices (older SAAs or piezometers for
example) then the ‘Devices’ tab should be used to enter in the serial numbers of those
devices.
c. The ‘Test’ tab can be used to perform basic connectivity and voltage / current checks
of the SAA.
d. By clicking the grey and green button, 'Start with Found SAAs ' that may appear beside
the 'Serial Port(s):' box, the application will launch the data collection portion of
SAARecorder (GO TO Section 6.1.8) for the detected SAA(s). The ‘Start with Found
SAAs’ button might not be visible for older SAAs.
Note: If the SAAFPU is connected wirelessly to a PC ensure the ‘Wireless’ checkbox is
checked.
December 2014
85
Figure 6.5: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAAFPU selected.
5. IF there are issues connecting to the SAAs GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K (‘Troubleshooting &
Support (Help)’).
6. Otherwise GO TO Section 6.1.6 (Connection Completion).
Connecting using the SAA232
Single SAAs can be connected to Measurand’s SAA232 converter (shown in Figure 6.6). The SAA232
converts the RS232 communications protocol from Measurand’s SAA232-USB cable (see Figure 6.7)
to the RS485 communications protocol that the SAA uses. It also incorporates a resettable fuse and
surge protection, and automatically applies power to an SAA only when there is serial RS232 data
being sent from the PC to the SAA232.
Note: The wireless adapters work as a pair, and each adapter will only work with its mate
when using a PC.
86
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.6: SAA232. The 4-pin green connector connects to the RS232 port of the PC. The 5-pin green connector connects
to the SAA.
Figure 6.7: SAA232-USB cable. This is a USB to serial converter for use with SAA232. The red wire shown above should
be connected to a +12 volt supply, and the black wire should be connected to GND of the same supply.
The following steps should be taken when using the SAA232 converter with an SAA:
1. The SAA232-USB cable must be plugged into a USB port on the PC that will be running
SAARecorder application. (Built-in PC serial ports can also be used to connect to an SAA232, see
step 3 below with regards to wiring)
2. Connect the SAA into the green 5-pin connector on the SAA232 (Figure 6.6). The SAA wiring is as
follows:
Pin 1: White SAA cable (RS485 A)
Pin 2: Blue SAA cable (RS485 B)
Pin 3: Red SAA cable (+12 V to SAA)
Pin 4: Black SAA cable (GND)
Pin 5: Shield
December 2014
87
Note: If an older SAA is being used, the wiring may use different colors for the RS485 A and
B communications wires, please check with Measurand if the user is unsure how to connect
these wires.
3. If connected using a USB port, Measurand’s SAA232-USB cable as shown in Figure 6.7 will be
needed.
 The green 4-pin connector will connect into the four pin terminal block in the SAA232.
 Make sure that the USB connector is plugged into an available USB port on the PC that
will be running the SAARecorder application.
 The red wire should be connected to a +12 V power supply.
 The black wire should be connected to Ground on the same power supply.
4. If connecting to the SAA232 via a serial port on the PC, connect the PC serial port to the green 4pin connector on the SAA232, using the following wiring:
Pin 1: PC serial port receive (RX)
Pin 2: PC serial port transmit (TX)
Pin 3: +12 V Power
Pin 4: GND (must be connected to both power supply and PC serial port)
5. Click the 'SAA232' choice under the 'Connection' tab, the window should appear as it is in Figure
6.8. Click the Serial Port that the SAA(s) is/are connected to.
a. Click 'Next' or the ‘Search’ tab. The ‘Search’ tab can be used to automatically detect
SAAs on individual COM ports.
b. If it is necessary to manually add certain devices (older SAAs or piezometers for
example) then the ‘Devices’ tab should be used to enter in the serial numbers of those
devices.
c. The ‘Test’ tab can be used to perform basic connectivity and voltage / current checks
of the SAA.
d. By clicking the grey and green button, 'Start with Found SAAs ' that may appear beside
the 'Serial Port(s):' box, the application will launch the data collection portion of
SAARecorder (GO TO Section 6.1.8) for the detected SAA(s). The ‘Start with Found
SAAs’ button might not be visible for older SAAs.
88
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.8: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAA232 selected.
6. IF there are issues connecting to the SAAs GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K (‘Troubleshooting &
Support (Help)’).
7. Otherwise GO TO Section 6.1.6 (Connection Completion).
Connecting using the SAA232-5
Figure 6.9: SAA232-5. 4-pin green connector connects to RS232 port of a PC. 5-pin green connectors connect up to five
SAAs.
Multiple SAAs can be connected to Measurand’s SAA232-5 converter. A picture of the SAA232-5 is
shown in Figure 6.9. The SAA232-5 works in much the same way as the SAA232 (converts RS232 to
RS485, provides surge protection for the SAA and applies power to a single SAA at a time) but it can
accept up to five SAAs and connects them all to one serial port of the PC. The SAA232-5 is used to
sample one SAA at a time through the same PC serial port. For applications where very fast readings
are required, multiple SAA232 or SAAUSB devices, or the SAAR Interface (for SAAR research SAAs)
should be used instead.
The following steps should be taken when using the SAA232-5 converter with two or more SAAs:
1. If using a USB to RS232 converter such as Measurand’s SAA232-USB cable, make sure that it is
plugged into an available USB port on the PC that will be running the SAARecorder application.
2. Plug the SAA(s) into the green 5-pin connectors on the SAA232-5. The SAA wiring is as follows:
Pin 1: White wire of SAA cable (RS485 A)
Pin 2: Blue wire of SAA cable (RS485 B)
December 2014
89
Pin 3: Red wire of SAA cable (+12 V to SAA)
Pin 4: Black wire of SAA cable (GND)
Pin 5: Shield
Note: If an older SAA is being used, the cable may have different colors for the RS485 A and
B communications wires, please check with Measurand if the user is unsure how to connect
these wires.
3. Connect the PC serial port to the green 4-pin connector on the SAA232-5, using the following
wiring:
Pin 1: PC serial port receive (RX)
Pin 2: PC serial port transmit (TX)
Pin 3: +12 V Power
Pin 4: GND (must be connected to both power supply and PC serial port)
4. Click the 'SAA232-5' choice under the 'Connection' tab, the window should appear as it is in Figure
6.10. Select the channels being used.
a. Click 'Next' or the ‘Search’ tab. The ‘Search’ tab can be used to automatically detect
SAAs on individual COM ports and SAA232-5 channels.
b. If it is necessary to manually add certain devices (older SAAs or piezometers for
example) then the ‘Devices’ tab should be used to enter in the serial numbers of those
devices.
c. The ‘Test’ tab can be used to perform basic connectivity and voltage / current checks
for the SAAs connected to the SAA232-5.
d. By clicking the grey and green button, 'Start with Found SAAs ' that may appear beside
the 'Serial Port(s):' box, the application will launch the data collection portion of
SAARecorder (GO TO Section 6.1.8) for the detected SAA(s). The ‘Start with Found
SAAs’ button might not be visible for older SAAs and SAA232-5 units.
90
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.10: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAA232-5 selected.
5. IF there are issues connecting to the SAAs GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K (‘Troubleshooting &
Support (Help)’).
6. Otherwise GO TO Section 6.1.6 (‘Connection Completion’).
Connecting using the SAAUSB Adapter
Single SAAs can be connected to Measurand’s SAAUSB adapter as shown in Figure 6.11. The SAAUSB
adapter appears as a serial port when it is connected to the PC running SAARecorder.
Older versions of SAAUSB are not recommended for long-term data collection, as they apply power
constantly to the SAA. Any upsets to the system, such as a momentary interruption of the application
of communication could lead to lock-up of one or more of the microprocessors in the SAA. Without
periodic cycling of power applied to the SAA (such as when using SAA232 or SAA232-5 or a recent
SAAUSB (model SAAUSB-003 or higher)), collection could eventually cease.
Figure 6.11: SAAUSB adapter model SAAUSB-002.
December 2014
91
Note: Measurand's SAAUSB adapter allows the user to interface to a single SAA; it appears
as a RS-232 serial port on the PC. The SAAUSB is supplied with a +12 volt power supply that
plugs directly into the SAAUSB. The USB plug end of the SAAUSB should be plugged into
the PC before plugging in the SAA and before finally plugging in the +12 volt power supply.
The following steps should be taken when using the SAAUSB with an SAA:
1. Plug the USB plug into an available USB port on the PC where SAARecorder is installed.
2. Mate the data cable from the SAA to the round connector of the SAAUSB.
3. Apply power to the SAA by plugging in the +12 VDC power supply into the power injector socket
on the SAAUSB.
4. Click the 'SAAUSB' choice under the 'Connection' tab, the window should appear as it is in Figure
6.12.
a. Click 'Next' or the ‘Search’ tab. The ‘Search’ tab can be used to automatically detect
SAAs on individual COM ports.
b. If it is necessary to manually add certain devices (older SAAs or piezometers for
example) then the ‘Devices’ tab should be used to enter in the serial numbers of those
devices.
c. The ‘Test’ tab can be used to perform basic connectivity and voltage / current checks
of the SAA.
d. By clicking the grey and green button, 'Start with Found SAAs ' that may appear beside
the 'Serial Port(s):' box, the application will launch the data collection portion of
SAARecorder (GO TO Section 6.1.8) for the detected SAA(s). The ‘Start with Found
SAAs’ button might not be visible for older SAAs.
Figure 6.12: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAAUSB selected.
5. IF there are issues connecting to the SAAs GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K (‘Troubleshooting &
Support (Help)’).
92
December 2014
SAA Software
6. Otherwise GO TO Section 6.1.6 (‘Connection Completion’).
Connection Completion
Figure 6.13: ‘Search’ tab while connecting SAA.
1. The Search tab. SAARecorder looks for SAAs on each of the previously selected serial ports
and / or SAA232-5 channels and tests communications with each microprocessor of an SAA.
Each microprocessor has a unique serial number and is responsible for one “octet” (group of
8 segments). If the search is successful (see Figure 6.13) and the expected device(s) are
found, click 'Next'.
a. IF there are issues connecting the SAAs GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K
(‘Troubleshooting & Support (Help)’).
2. Some devices are not automatically detected, the ‘Devices’ tab is where they would be added
manually, the window should look similar to Figure 6.14.
Figure 6.14: ‘Device Connection’ window.
December 2014
93



Devices that have been previously found in the ‘Connection’ or ‘Search’ tab should
appear here automatically. Some devices, such as piezometers and older SAAs, need
to be added manually however.
This can be done by clicking on the ‘Add Device’ link in the ‘Devices’ tab.
Enter the Serial Number and COM Port.
Figure 6.15: ‘Add Device’ window.
 Click ‘OK’.
 Repeat until all desired devices have been added
 Once all the devices have been selected click 'Next'.
3. The ‘Test’ tab runs Basic and Voltage/Current tests on the devices before starting
SAARecorder application. The window should look similar to Figure 6.16. Both tests can be
performed if desired.
 The SAARecorder interface for viewing and recording data can be started by clicking
the ‘Continue’ or ‘Save and Continue’ button.
Figure 6.16: ‘Device Test’ window.
4. GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K (‘Troubleshooting & Support (Help)’).
Other Startup Window Options
The following are other options to the ‘Start Up’ window (Figure 6.2) for SAARecorder.
94
December 2014
SAA Software
1. Open Raw Data
o To open a raw data “*.rsa” file previously stored by the PC using SAARecorder.
2. Load Configuration
o This option opens a previously saved configuration by the user through SAARecorder.
o An ‘Open File’ window opens seeking a “[name]_[serial number].txt” file in a project
folder.
o Once a file is selected the ‘Hardware Connection’ window opens to allow for testing or
adding devices.
o See Section 6.1.
3. Just Start SAARecorder
o Opens SAARecorder without going through the Connection process or opening files.
o This option is available in case, either,
 There have been difficulties connecting the SAAs,
 A startup procedure identical to that of older SAARecorder versions is preferred.
 To view the application whether an SAA is connected or not.
Once SAARecorder has started
1. SAARecorder may ask for confirmation of using 2-D or 3-D mode
Figure 6.17: ‘Operational Mode’ window.
‘3D Mode’
IF the SAAs are vertical (or have all segments inclined at least 30 degrees from horizontal)
then use ‘3D Mode’ so that the full 3-D shapes of the SAAs can be modeled. ‘2D Mode’ should
not be used in this situation, as it depends on sensors that have less accuracy when vertical.
3-D mode also provides the full XYZ data set.
‘2D Mode’
IF the SAAs are horizontal or mostly horizontal, with all segments within 30 degrees of
horizontal, then the ‘2D Mode’ option should be selected. If there are some segments near
vertical and some near horizontal, then the ‘2D Mode’ + ‘some segments more than 60
degrees from horizontal’ options should be selected.
December 2014
95
Note: For more complete explanation of these modes of operation, please see Section
6.4.4, ‘SAA Setup | Mode’.
2. The ‘Program’ window with the ‘Basic Settings’ window shown in Figure 6.19 will open.
SAA Reference Drop-down Menu
See Section 6.4.3
Averaging
See Section 6.4.2
Use Averaging-in-Array (AIA) mode Checkbox
See Section 6.4.2
Modeling Mode
See Section 6.4.4
Figure 6.18: Application view of SAARecorder showing a single SAA in 3D mode. This view shows three orthographic
views of the SAA, plus a fourth perspective view (lower-right corner).
96
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.19: ‘Basic Settings’ window.
Note: Clicking on the lower right view and then keying “1” will change to a single 3-D
rotatable view.
6.2 Saving and Exporting Raw Data (File)
Figure 6.20: View of the ‘File’ drop down menu.
File | Auto-save raw data file(s)
December 2014
97
Note: Before saving raw data files, ensure that ‘SAA Setup | Averaging / AIA Mode’
(Section 6.4.2) and ‘SAA Setup | Sampling Rate’ (Section 6.4.7) have been set to sensible
values
Selecting 'File | Auto-save raw data file(s’ allows the user to automatically record raw data at selected
time intervals after filling in a few settings shown in Figure 6.21.
Figure 6.21: ‘Auto-Save Raw Data’ window.
1. Raw Data Recording Type
 Specifies whether the recordings will be saved as individual files or as one growing
file where every new recording is added to the end.
2. Folder To Store Raw Data Files
 Where the files are to be stored
 It
is
recommended
to
save
them
under
‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\[project_name]’, or somewhere easily found.
3. Raw Data Filename Prefix
 Text to be applied at the beginning of each raw data file to be created.
4. Raw Data Filename Suffix
 Puts a date or number stamp at the end of the raw data files to be created.
5. Record new raw data every:
 Specifies the time between recordings.
98
December 2014
SAA Software

6.
7.
8.
9.
Remember to consider the length of time it takes to record one file, if the time
between recordings is too short it will not work.
 The time specified is from the beginning of one recording to the beginning of the
next.
Stop saving raw data:
 Choose how to end each raw data recording (ex: apply a sample limit or time for each
recording).
Save Joint Positions and Data as Text Snapshot File
 If selected will save an additional text snapshot file per raw data recording.
Save Joint Positions in Atlas Format
 Saves an additional text output file of position data using the “Atlas_3” file format.
Stop sampling when not recording to raw data file
 Toggle whether or not to stop sampling altogether when not recording to a raw data
file.
 This option should be selected for battery-powered installations.
File | Quick save button
When clicked a large green 'Record Data' button appears on the bottom left of the window Figure
6.22. When clicked it records one sample for all segments of each SAA and then creates a raw data
file prompting for a unique file name Figure 6.23.
The button remains until the menu item is un-checked. For more information on the ‘Text Snapshot
File’ option available on the ‘Choose Raw Data Filename’ window, see Section 6.2.7.
Figure 6.22: The green ‘Record Data’ button that appears when ‘File | Quick Save’ is selected.
December 2014
99
Figure 6.23: The ‘Choose Raw Data Filename’ window that appears once recording is complete.
By selecting the ‘Save Scan Report Files’ the SAAScanReport application will open (Figure 6.49), go to
Section 6.2.8.
File| Save raw data file
Note: Before saving raw data files, ensure that ‘SAA Setup | Averaging / AIA Mode’
(Section 6.4.2) and ‘SAA Setup | Sampling Rate’ (Section 6.4.7) have been set to sensible
values.
The 'Save Raw Data File' menu item (or pressing the Spacebar) is similar to the ‘Quick Save’ button
except that 1) there is no green button and 2) it allows the user to record as many samples as desired.
The ‘Save Raw Data File’ records SAA data to a "raw shape array" (“.rsa”) file on the PC. The following
‘Recording’ window shown in Figure 6.24 will appear.
Selecting the 'File | Save Raw Data File' menu item saves the raw data as soon as the recording is
manually stopped:



Hitting the ‘Stop’ button or
Closing the ‘Recording’ window or
Selecting the ‘File | Close Raw Data File’ menu item, see Figure 6.23.
The raw data that is saved can be exported to text or can be exported to Measurand’s SAAView
application.
100
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.24: ‘Playback / Recording’ window for recording raw shape array (.rsa) data.
File| Open raw data file
A "raw shape array" (.rsa) file can be played back in SAARecorder by selecting the 'File | Open Raw
Data File' item from the ‘Main’ menu. This brings up the window shown in Figure 6.25.
Figure 6.25: ‘Playback / Recording’ window for playback of raw data files. Controls within this window allow one to
move backwards or forwards through the file and control the playback speed.
If playing back a very large raw data file, it is possible to save a subset of that file to a smaller raw data
file. This can be done by clicking on the ‘File | Save Subset’ menu item of the ‘Playback’ window see
Figure 6.25. This brings up a window similar to that shown in Figure 6.26 that allows for specifying the
range of samples to copy over to the new raw data file.
December 2014
101
Figure 6.26: ‘Save Subset of Raw Data File’ window.
File| Close raw data file
The recording can be stopped by:



Closing the ‘Playback / Recording’ window
o The ‘X’ at the top right corner of the window.
clicking the ‘Stop’ button in the above window
o The button with the black square in the center of the window.
Or selecting 'File | Close Raw Data File' from the ‘Main’ menu.
Once the recording has been stopped, a dialog appears prompting to select a filename for the
recorded data, similar to Figure 6.23.
File | Export raw data to
Exports raw data to:
6.2.6.1 SAAView
Raw data recorded in SAARecorder as “.rsa” files can be converted to a “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file
that can be opened in Measurand’s SAAView application (Section 7). SAAView has many graphical
interfaces and options available for viewing SAA data over a long period of time.
In order to convert one or more “.rsa” files to a “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file that can be opened in
SAAView:
1.
2.
3.
4.
102
Select the ‘File | Export raw data to SAAView’ menu item.
A ‘Select Files’ window opens allowing the user to select one or more files at a time.
Once the files have been selected, click ’Select’.
The ‘Time vs. Samples’ window will open, see Figure 6.27.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.27: ‘Time vs. Samples’ graph for exporting to SAAView.

File Averages
o Data arrives from files, concatenated together.
o Performs discrete averages, one per file (Output = 1 sample per file).
 Step Averages
o Data arrives in groups (steps) with pauses in between.
o Performs discrete averages, one per “step” (Number of samples will be reduced).
 Discrete Average(s) of:
o Set number of samples to average in each discrete average.
o Number of samples will be reduced.
 Running Averages of:
o Set number of samples to average as a running average.
o Number of samples will not change.
 No Averaging
o Leave raw data unchanged.
5. Once the desired options are made, click ‘OK’.
6. After processing all the samples and files the window seen in Figure 6.28 will be available.
Figure 6.28: ‘SAA Conversion Parameters’ window.
7. Select the options that suit the SAA raw data files selected and choose a “Site” file if required.
December 2014
103

Sernum
o The Serial Number of the SAA.
 Vertical
o Is the SAA vertical?
 Ref=Far
o Is the reference end the far end?
 Az. Deg
o The offset of Azimuth in degrees.
 NumSeg
o The number of Segments in this SAA.
 StartSeg
o The segment to start with.
o This allows for skipping starting segments.
 EndSeg
o The segment to end with.
o This allows for skipping end segments.
 SlavedSegs
o A comma separated list of slaved segments.
 Site File
o This file is only required for:
 SuperSets of SAAs
 Convergence SAAs
 Non-SAA sensors
8. Click ‘OK’.
9. SAACR_raw2data will be run for the conversion, once complete a window will pop-up with the
location of the new files for SAAView.
 ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data\multi_saa_allcart.mat”
6.2.6.2 A text file
The converted text files can contain comma-separated position, bend angles, acceleration data, and
temperatures. Files in this format can be opened by spreadsheet software.
1. Select the ‘File | Export raw data to text’ menu item.
2. A ‘Choose a raw data file to export to text’ window will open, select the file or files and click
‘Open’.
3. The ‘Export to Text Data‘ window will open, see Figure 6.29.
104
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.29: ‘Export to Text Data’ window.
4. Select the options that suit the SAA raw data files selected.
 Export data for all SAAs
o Check this check-box to export all available SAAs in the ‘Available SAAs’ list.
 Available SAAs
o A list of all available SAAs for this export.
o This list is dictated by the files selected in the ‘File Selection’ window.
 Selected SAAs
o All the SAAs selected.
 Add to Selected Button
o Highlight one or more SAAs in the ‘Available SAAs’ list then click this button
to move them to the ‘Selected SAAs’ list.
 Remove from Selected Button
o Highlight one or more SAAs in the ‘Selected SAAs’ list then click this button
to remove them from the list.
 Export all data samples
o Check this check-box to export all the data.
 Export Sample From:
o Ensure the ‘Export All Data Samples’ check-box is un-checked.
December 2014
105



o Enter the start and end times to export.
o There will be one start and end time for each SAA.
View Text Output in Text Editor
o Checking this check-box will open a text editor when the conversion is
complete.
o This option will only work if there is a text editor associated with “.txt” files.
Select Data to Export Button
o Clicking this button opens the window in Figure 6.30.
o Each SAA in the ‘Selected SAAs’ list will be represented as a tab.
o Select data to be included in the export for EACH SAA:
 SAA Joints to Export
o Type a hyphenated range of joint numbers OR
o Type comma-separated joint numbers OR
o Type ‘All’ for all joints.
 Acc. X, Acc. Y, Acc. Z
o Acceleration at X, Y, and/or Z.
 Pos. X, Pos. Y, Pos. Z
o Position of X, Y and/or Z.
 Rot. X, Rot. Y
o Rotation angles around X and/or Y.
 Absolute Tilt
 Temperature
 Time (sec)
o Click ‘OK’ when selections for ALL SAAs have been made.
Start Conversion Button
o Start conversion of raw data to text.
Figure 6.30: ‘Select Data to Export to Text’ window.
106
December 2014
SAA Software
5. A ‘Choose a text filename for SAA SAAF_[serial number]_[number of segments]’ window opens
to allow the user to select a location and name for the newly created “Text” file.
6. Once a name and location for the “Text” file have been selected and the ‘OK’ button clicked, the
window in Figure 6.31 opens.
7. ‘Sampling and Output Options’ window is to select how the data should be sampled for the
output “Text” file.
 Leave Sampling Unchanged
 Resample at xx Hz
 One Averaged Sample per Data Collection Interval
8. Click ‘OK’.
9. Once the conversion is complete a window will pop-up with the location of the new “Text” file.
 ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data\**.txt”
Figure 6.31: ‘Sampling and Output Options’ window.
Figure 6.32: A view of the created text file in Notepad.
December 2014
107
6.2.6.3 An Atlas file
Raw data recorded in SAARecorder as “.rsa” files can be converted to a “Text” file of joint position
data in the Atlas_3 format.
1. Select the ‘File | Export raw data to Atlas’ menu item.
2. A ‘Choose a raw data file to export to Atlas’ window will open, select the file or files and click
‘Open’.
3. The ‘Time vs. Samples’ window will open, see Figure 6.27.
4. Once the desired options are made, click ‘OK’, see Section 6.2.6.1 for details.
5. The window in Figure 6.33 opens.
 Atlas_1 places X, Y, and Z axis data in separate “Text” files.
 Atlas_3 combines X, Y, and Z axis data into a single file.
Figure 6.33: ‘Choose Atlas File Format’ window.
6. Click ‘OK’, and select a destination for the created “Atlas” file.
7. Once the conversion is complete a window will pop-up with the location of the new “Text” file.
 For Atlas_3
o ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data\SAAF_[Serial Number]_[# of
Segments]_XYZ.txt”
 For Atlas_1
o ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data\SAAF_[Serial Number]_[# of
Segments]_X.txt”
o ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data\SAAF_[Serial Number]_[# of
Segments]_Y.txt”
o ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data\SAAF_[Serial Number]_[# of
Segments]_Z.txt”
6.2.6.4 Grout Anchor Data
This function is used for dragging SAAs through inclined grout anchor holes (typically inclined between
30 and 70 degrees from horizontal). For example, a hole could be 50 m long, but an SAA could be 10
m long, so it could be dragged through in 6 poses (allowing some overlap between poses).
Each raw data file is input in the interface, along with the distance that the SAA is pulled, and then the
application presents graphs showing lateral deviation and inclination changes.
108
December 2014
SAA Software
1. Select the ‘File | Export Grout Anchor Data’ menu item.
2. The window in Figure 6.34 will open:
Figure 6.34: ‘Export Grout Anchor Data’ window.

Distance of Hole to Measure:
o The total distance the SAA will travel.
 Raw Data Filename Pose #1, #2…#n
o The raw data file pose, in order.
 Move Dist Pose #1, #2, … #n
o The distance that pose moved.
o If the SAA was moved towards the near (cable) end then the number is
negative.
o If the SAA was moved towards the far end then the number here is positive.
 Add Raw Data File
o Add another line for a raw data file.
3. Click ‘OK’.
4. A ‘Save the Source File with a Distinctive Name’ window will open allowing the user to name the
file with a distinctive name. Click ‘Save’.
5. The Anchor View application will open, see Figure 6.35.
December 2014
109
Figure 6.35: ‘Anchor View’ application opened while saving Anchor Grout Data.




110
File | Re-Save Source File
o This allows the user to save changes, add notes and titles to the current file.
File | Export Header/Notes/Data
o Creates a text file, e.g. “accSummary_01-3600_xyz.txt”, with header information,
Notes and Data.
o User is prompted to select location and change the default file name.
File | Save Figure Image
o Creates an image file, e.g. “accSummary_01-3600_xyz.png”, of the window view.
o User is prompted to select location and change the default file name.
View | View Details / Notes
o Opens a window view of the file header containing SAA details.
o See Figure 6.36.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.36: ‘Joint File Header + Notes’ window.


View | Edit Notes
o Allows the user to makes notes that are added to the Header and details.
View | Edit Attribution
o Allows the user to add a title to the window.
o See Figure 6.37.
Figure 6.37: ‘User Attribution’ window.


Settings | ZOOM +/o Allows scaling for views.
Settings | Manual Scaling
December 2014
111
o
o
Allows the user to change various aspects of the display.
See Figure 6.38.
Figure 6.38: ‘Set Manual Scaling’ window.


Settings | Auto Scaling
o When checked all scaling is done by default.
Settings | Polyfit Order
o See Figure 6.39.
Figure 6.39: ‘Set Polyfit Order’ window.

112
Settings | Design Angle
o See Figure 6.40.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.40: ‘Set Angle of Design Path’ window.

Settings | Line Color/Visible
o See Figure 6.41.
Figure 6.41: ‘Set Line Colors’ window.

Advanced | Set Additional Normalization
o Enables additional normalization of selected poses by a selected pose.
o This should ONLY be used if some of the poses are self-consistent in pattern of roll
angles in the ‘normalization’ graphs which appear when this option is selected.
o “Additional” means in addition to the near-most pose being used to “calibrate” or
“normalize” all the poses, which is always done automatically.
o Pose number (1 is FAR), roll angle (0 means X is up), and Standard Deviation of roll
angles along Pose (STD) are shown as an aid to judging pattern.
o CAUTION! Additional Normalization can remove real curvature, thereby underreporting the deformation.
o If no patterns are seen, do not use this feature.
o To remove this feature, uncheck all Poses.
o See Figure 6.42.
December 2014
113
Figure 6.42: ‘Select Additional Normalization’ window.








114
Advanced | Legacy Mean Normalization
o When checked, enables a normalization of roll of all non-NEAR poses by the mean of
the rolls along all non-NEAR poses.
Advanced | Additional Filtering
o When checked, filters accelerations in individual poses before they are combined.
X – Z Graph
o Inward (x), m vs Elevation (z), m
Y – Z Graph
o Lateral (y), m vs Elevation (z), m
X – Y Graph
o Inward (x), m vs Lateral (y), m
Y – VertDeviation Graph
o Lateral (y), m vs Vertical Deviation, m
ZOOM +/- Button
o Same as ‘File | ZOOM +/-‘.
(X-Z)/(S-Z) Button
o Dimension S is co-linear with the starting center-line of the anchor.
o Use the ‘(X-Z)/(S-Z)’ button to change relevant views from/to “along the anchor”.
December 2014
SAA Software
o
o
Before clicking the ‘(X-Z)/(S-Z)’ button, see Figure 6.35.
After clicking the ‘(X-Z)/(S-Z)’ button, see Figure 6.43.
Figure 6.43: The display view after clicking the ‘(X-Z)/(S-Z)’ button.
File | Save text snapshot of SAA data
At any time when viewing live SAA data, or when playing back a recorded raw data file, the Cartesian
XYZ locations for all of an SAA's joints can also be captured by clicking on the 'File | Save text snapshot
of SAA data' menu item.
This brings up a window asking for a “Text” file name to be selected, and then brings up the ‘Choose
Position Format’ window shown in Figure 6.45.
 Select the 'File | Save text snapshot of SAA data' menu item.
 The window in Figure 6.44 will appear requesting the user to select which data to save a snapshot
of.
 Current Live Data
o Save a snapshot of the current data that is running in SAARecorder.
 Select Raw Data Files
o Save a snapshot of raw data that has been previously saved.
o Selecting this will open a ‘Choose File’ window for the user to select the raw
data file.
December 2014
115
Figure 6.44: Choose between live data and saved raw data.
 After selecting which data to save, the window in Figure 6.45 will open.
 Select Data to Save Button
o Choose which columns are to appear in the output text data file.
o See Figure 6.30.
 Base Reference Text File
o This is Optional, used for tracking relative displacements instead of actual
displacements.
o Leave blank if no reference “Text” file is used.
 View Created Text File
o View output text data in a text editor once ‘OK’ is clicked.
 Relative to “Straight”
o Modifies all output XYZ data to be relative to a “straight”, unbent condition
of the SAA.
 Create Graphical Report
o View a graphical report of the output Cartesian data.
 Create Scan Report (.DOC and .PDF file formats)
o Once ‘OK’ is clicked the SAAScanReport application opens, see Section 6.2.9.
Figure 6.45: Options for saving text snapshot files. It is possible to specify a base reference file, in order to view
displacement data relative to this reference file.
116
December 2014
SAA Software
 Once all choices are made and ‘OK’ is clicked,
 The ‘XYZ Summary’ Graph window will open see Figure 6.46.
 A window displaying the saved file location.
o ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAArecorder\Data\SAAF_[serial number].txt’
 A text editor showing the “Text” file Header if ‘View Created Text File’ was selected.
Figure 6.46: The ‘XYZ Summary’ window.
 Make Selections and close the window when complete.
 XZ Graph Options
o Change graph limits and other graph settings for the XZ data graph.
o See Figure 6.47.
 YZ Graph Options
o Change graph limits and other graph settings for the YZ data graph.
o See Figure 6.47.
December 2014
117
Figure 6.47: ‘Graph Options’ for either XZ or YZ graph.



Save Polyfit Data
o Save polynomial fit data to a “Text” file.
Capture Window
o Save a screen capture of this window to a “bitmap” (“.bmp”) or “portable
network graphic” (“.png”) file.
Print Window
 Send a screen capture of this window to a local printer.
File | Generate Scan Reports from Current Data
If an SAA is being used for a scanning application (i.e. to measure the shape of a borehole) it is possible
to generate report documents in Microsoft Word (DOC format) and Adobe Acrobat (PDF format). This
functionality can be accessed through:
File | Quick Save Button
File | Save Raw Data File
File | Save Text Snapshot of SAA Data
File | Generate Scan Reports from Current Data
File | Generate Scan Reports from Text Snapshots
Selecting this option allows for the creation of a “Scan Report” from current data using the
SAAScanReport application. This menu item requires that SAARecorder be either:
i.
ii.
118
Collecting data form one or more SAAs.
Playing back a raw data (“.rsa”) file containing data from one or more SAAs.
December 2014
SAA Software
Once selected a window gives the user the option to create a filename prefix and a save location, see
Figure 6.48.
Figure 6.48: Scan Report Output window.
As shown in Figure 6.49 the user may enter in text and / or an image to appear in the header of the
report, as well as an image in the footer of the report.
Limits can be specified as either fixed deviation limits (in mm) or percentage deviation limits (deviation
expressed as a percentage value of the distance along the SAA) or angular deviation limits (deviation
expressed as an angular separation from the desired borehole direction). The desired borehole
direction can be expressed as either “Deviation Relative to Vertical / Horizontal” or “Deviation Relative
to Line”. For boreholes which are nominally vertical or horizontal, the “Deviation Relative to Vertical
/ Horizontal” option should be selected. Otherwise, the “Deviation Relative to Line” option should be
selected and point values in mm should be entered for the starting point and ending point of the hole,
see Figure 6.49.
Figure 6.49: SAAScanReport application.
December 2014
119
Figure 6.49 is an example of settings used for generating a report for a non-vertical (and nonhorizontal) borehole. In this example the start point of the borehole is set to 0, 0, 0 and the end point
is set to 12000,0,12000 mm. So the borehole is at a 45 ° angle from vertical in the XZ plane.
After the deviation settings and the header / footer settings have been selected, the ‘Generate
Report(s)’ button can be clicked to generate the “.doc” and “.pdf” report files.
SAA Serial Number:
Borehole Deviation (bottom):
Borehole Deviation (top):
56369
0.0 mm
532.1 mm
Maximum permissible hole deviation: 1000.0 mm
Within the allowable deviation (yes / no): yes
Figure 6.50: First page of Scan Report showing plain view of SAA Shape with fixed deviation limit circle.
120
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.51: Second page of Scan Report showing section view of SAA shape (in XZ and YZ sections) with fixed deviation
limits.
File | Generate Scan Reports from Text Snapshot(s)
This menu option requires the availability of one or more text snapshot files to convert into report
documents of the scanned shape.
Selecting this option opens the window in Figure 6.49, see previous section for instructions. Once the
‘Generate Report(s)’ button is clicked, the ‘Open Existing “Text Snapshot” file(s)’ window will open
December 2014
121
prompting the user to select “.txt” files previously created using the ‘File | Save Text Snapshot of SAA
Data’ menu option.
File | Concatenate horizontal pose data
Selecting this option uses the same sort of interface as 'Export grout anchor data' (see Figure 6.34),
except that it is used for pulling a short SAA through a long horizontal hole. An “.rsa” raw data file is
entered for each pose, and then "stitched" together by the application to determine the total shape
of the horizontal hole (i.e. the 2-D elevation profile along its length).
The view and options are similar though less than Section 6.2.6.4. The graphical view only shows the
raw data and overlap. For more information on available options see Section 6.2.6.4.
Figure 6.52: ‘Concatenate Horizontal Pose Data’ window.
Grouping Multiple Raw Data (or Text) Files Together
If there is a number of raw data files (or a number of “Text” files) that have been separately created
for an SAA or group of SAAs, they can be concatenated together using the “SAA_Concat.exe” utility
which is included in the installation folder of SAARecorder. Simply run the “SAA_Concat.exe” utility to
bring up a window similar to that shown in Figure 6.53.
If “Text” files are being concatenated, an optional XYZ “Base Reference” file (created using the ‘File |
Save text snapshot of SAA data’ menu item) can be specified. Specifying a “Base Reference” file makes
all of the position measurements in the concatenated output relative to the base reference positions.
1. Click ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\SAA_Concat.exe’.
122
December 2014
SAA Software
2.
3.
4.
5.
Browse for all files to be concatenated.
Add a “Base Reference” File if desired.
Click ‘OK’.
A window will open giving the location of the newly created “Text” file.
Figure 6.53: SAA_Concat.exe utility is used for concatenating multiple raw data files (or multiple “Text” files) together
into one big long file. In the window above, five raw data files have been selected for concatenation.
6.3 Communications
Figure 6.54: View of the ‘Communications’ drop down menu.
Communications | Baud Rate
This menu option is available for all SAAs with serial numbers 40000 and higher. It allows the user to
set the communications baud rate to either 38400, 57600, 115200, or 230400 bps. Information
specifying how the baud rate influences the maximum data rate attainable can be found in Appendix
D. Unless there is a particular need, the lowest rate should be used.
December 2014
123
Figure 6.55: ‘Select Baud Rate’ window.
Communications | Check available COM ports
This function gives a list of all the COM ports available and is only available when there are more than
the current in use COM port.
Figure 6.56: List of available COM Ports.
Communications | Search for serial SAAs
This menu option is available if SAARecorder is open but not connected to any SAAs. Choosing this
menu item will start the connection process for SAAs. The following windows will open:
1. ‘Operational Mode’ window where 2-D or 3-D view is chosen.
Figure 6.57: ‘Operational Mode’ window where 2-D or 3-D view is chosen.
124
December 2014
SAA Software
No SAA is connected:
2. ‘ShapeAccelArray Startup’ window where a file, configuration or a connection needs to be
chosen.
Figure 6.58: ShapeAccelArray ‘Startup’ window where a file, configuration or a connections needs to be chosen.






Using Serial-to-Ethernet Device Checkbox
o Make sure that the ‘Using Serial-to-Ethernet Device’ option is checked if using a serial
to Ethernet (or Wireless Ethernet) converter, such as Lantronix, WiBox or an RF4XX
wireless serial modem.
o If this option is checked, an additional ‘Timeout’ field appears to the right of the
checkbox allowing the user to enter a value for the added communications delay. The
default value of 500 ms will work for most wireless installations.
Use Last SAA Configuration Button
o If the same SAAs are about to be used in the current SAARecorder session that were
used in the previous SAARecorder session, then the ‘Use Last SAA Configuration’
button can be used to start collection data from those same SAAs.
Using SAA232-5 Device(s) Checkbox
o The ‘Using SAA232-5 Device(s)’ checkbox should be checked if the SAA(s) are
connected to one or more SAA232-5 devices.
Network SAAs | Use Network SAAs Button
o The ‘Use Network SAAs’ button should only be clicked if an older SAA system is being
used with an Ethernet data concentrator. Instructions are found in Appendix A for
connecting this type of hardware.
Test | Voltage / Current Check Button
o Clicking this button brings up a window prompting the user to select a serial COM
port for communications with the SAA and an SAA232-5 channel, if an SAA232-5 is in
use. A window then appears displaying voltage, current, and temperature data from
the top segment of the SAA. This window is described in Section 6.7.1.1.
Open Raw Data File Button
December 2014
125
o

This button opens a previously “Recorded Raw Data” (.rsa) file for viewing in
SAARecorder.
Serial Port SAAs | Use Serial SAAs Button
o This button is used to connect to one or more SAAs through a serial communication
link.
o After clicking this button the steps listed below should be followed to select the
correct serial (COM) port and select which SAA serial numbers should be used.
An SAA is connected:
2. ‘Choose Serial Port’ window where a serial port must be chosen to connect to.
Figure 6.59: ‘Choose Serial Port’ window where a serial port must be chosen to connect to.
3. ‘SAA Serial Numbers to Search’ window where only the serial numbers of the SAAs to be
recorded are listed. An ‘Add / Remove’ button is available.
Figure 6.60: ‘SAA Serial Numbers to Search’ window.
126
December 2014
SAA Software
4. ‘SAA Startup’ window opens (see Figure 6.58) just as it processes and then closes to open the
‘Basic Settings’ window (see Figure 6.19). This window is where averaging is turned off or on
and the referencing point is chosen. See Section 6.4.1.
An SAA is connected but Serial Numbers are NOT Responsive:
2. A ‘Troubleshooting’ window opens, see Figure 6.61.
Figure 6.61: ‘Troubleshooting’ window.
All troubleshooting questions in the ‘Troubleshooting’ window have a ‘more…’ link that opens a
window giving more information on how to answer the questions.


Try Finding SAA(s) Again
o Opens the window in Figure 6.60.
Start With Found SAAs
o Opens the window in Figure 6.58.
Communications | Serial port connections
This function opens a window listing the SAA names and the COM port(s) they are associated with.
See Figure 6.62.
December 2014
127
Figure 6.62: ‘SAA Serial Ports’ window.
Communications | Advanced | Network | Network connections
This function lists the IP addresses associated with the PC, there is an ‘Add / Remove’ button as well.
It is only for use with a Network Data Concentrator (see Appendix C).
Figure 6.63: ‘Network Connections’ window.
Communications | Advanced | Network | Search for network SAAs
This function is used for finding SAA(s) connected to a Network Data Concentrator. See Appendix C
for details.
128
December 2014
SAA Software
6.4 SAA Setup
Figure 6.64: View of the’ SAA Setup’ drop down menu.
SAA Setup | View Basic Settings
This menu item opens the ‘Basic Settings’ window (see Figure 6.19). The ‘Basic Settings’ window
allows the user to view and change the reference point for the SAA (near or far), the amount of
averaging to perform, whether or not to use the “Averaging-in-Array” (AIA) mode, and the modeling
mode (2-D or 3-D). It also displays an indication of how much sleep time is left, if the SAA(s) are
currently in sleep mode (see Section 6.4.7 ‘SAA Setup | Sampling Rate’) and not collecting data.




SAA Reference Drop-down Menu
o See Section 6.4.3 for more information.
Averaging
o See Section 6.4.2 for more information.
Use Averaging-in-Array (AIA) mode Checkbox
o See Section 6.4.2 for more information.
Modeling Mode
o See Section 6.4.4 for more information.
SAA Setup | Averaging / AIA Mode
This option allows the user to modify how many samples of raw data are averaged on an ongoing
basis. If the ‘Averaging mode’ option check box is not available (older SAAs with serial numbers less
than 47100) or is not checked then the averaging value can be set to anywhere between 1 (i.e. no
averaging) and 1000 (i.e. average the last 1000 samples for computing displayed shape, position, and
acceleration data).
December 2014
129
Note: Averaging-in-Array (AIA) Mode should be used if static data are to be collected. AIA
Mode can collect and average many more samples in the same time.
Figure 6.65: ‘Averaging’ window.
If the ‘Averaging Mode’ option check box is available, then it should be checked if collecting static
shape data. In AIA mode, samples are collected within the SAA at a rate of 400 samples per second,
and output from the SAA once the requested averaging level has been reached. For example, if the
AIA averaging level were set to 1000, then averaged results would be sent from the SAA after a period
of about 3.5 seconds. (2.5 seconds of collection at 400 s/s, plus some overhead) When using AIA
mode, the averaging level can be set to as low as 100 samples, or as high as 25500 samples.
SAA Setup | Reference
Allows the user to select which end of the SAA (near (cable) end or far (tip) end) to use as the reference
end or starting point for SAA calculations.
Figure 6.66: Changing the SAA reference in the ‘SAASetup’ menu.
130
December 2014
SAA Software
SAA Setup | Mode
Calculations for the SAA(s) can be made in one of three possible modes: (i) Near Horizontal (2D), (ii)
Mixed (Convergence), and (iii) Near Vertical (3D).
Figure 6.67: Changing the Mode of SAARecorder in the ‘SAASetup’ menu.



Near horizontal (2D) mode
o Appropriate when no segments of the SAA are inclined more than 60 degrees relative to
the horizontal.
o It assumes that the SAA is moving in the vertical plane only; i.e. it does not model any
lateral or horizontal bending of the SAA.
Mixed (convergence) mode
o Appropriate when some SAA segments are inclined less than 30 degrees from horizontal
and some SAA segments are inclined more than 60 degrees from horizontal.
o It also assumes that the SAA is moving in the vertical plane only; i.e. with no lateral or
horizontal bending of any SAA segments.
o This mode is normally used for SAAs that are being used to monitor circular shapes, such
as the circumference of a tunnel.
Near vertical (3D) mode
o The SAA is assumed to be bending about the two horizontal (X and Y) axes.
o The near vertical mode can generally be used if all segments of the SAA are greater than
30 degrees relative to the horizontal.
SAA Setup | Site Properties
This menu item allows the user to specify the base position, azimuth angle, and an optional site
location name for each SAA.
December 2014
131
Figure 6.68: ‘Site Properties’ window.




132
X, Y, Z Positions
o Determine a base or start position of the SAA, use those coordinates here.
Azimuth Angle
o See Appendix I (‘Finding Azimuth’) OR
o Click the ‘Determine Azimuth’ button.
Determine Azimuth Button
o Clicking this button opens the ‘SAA Azimuth Determination’ window.
o Use this window to determine the base azimuth for the site properties.
o This is the preferred method of determining azimuth if there are no visible X-marks
located near the top of the borehole bring measured.
Location Name
o Give the location of this SAA a name.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.69: ‘Azimuth Determination’ window.

SAA Azimuth Determination window
o Side and Top View
 The red segment is the segment chosen.
o SAA segment to use for determining azimuth:
 Choose which segment to reference for base azimuth.
o Enter an angle of SAA going into hole:
 The angle relative to north of the SAA reference segment.
 Requires sighting of this segment towards the near (cable) end of the SAA.
o Acc. X of Segment #n:
 The x-axis acceleration of the segment used for determining SAA azimuth.
 Un-editable.
o Acc. Y of Segment #n:
 The y-axis acceleration of the segment used for determining SAA azimuth.
 Un-editable.
o SAA Azimuth:
 The currently calculated azimuth of the SAA.
 I.e. the direction relative to north in which the X-mark of the SAA is pointing.
 Un-editable.
SAA Setup | Units
This menu function allows the user to specify whether inches, millimeters, or meters will be used in
the numeric display and file outputs.
December 2014
133
Figure 6.70: ‘Choose Units’ window.
SAA Setup | Sampling Rate
This menu option allows the user to select a data sampling interval or frequency for all connected
SAAs.
The data sampling rate is controlled through SAARecorder application, and as such the instantaneous
sampling rate may vary slightly, although the average sampling rate should be exact. For more precise
timing, a hardware-based clock can be used to trigger data (see Section 6.4.15 ‘SAA Setup | Advanced
| Hardware Triggering’) Also, it is possible to have SAARecorder “go to sleep” periodically (with no
data collection) for a specified length of time, before collecting data for a specified length of time.
Figure 6.71: ‘Enter New Sampling Frequency’ window used for setting the sampling frequency for all connected SAAs.




134
Sample as quickly as possible
o SAA data will be sampled as quickly as possible
o When SAARecorder is NOT in Sleep Mode.
Sample at selected data rate
o Sample at the data rate specified below.
o When SAARecorder is NOT in Sleep Mode.
Sample at constant rate
Go to sleep Periodically
December 2014
SAA Software
o


Awake interval
 Length of time from the end of one sleep interval to the beginning of the next
sleep interval.
 Can also be thought of as the ‘Awake’ or ‘Sampling’ time.
o Sleep Interval
 Length of time that SAAs are asleep before data collection begins.
Frequent Sampling
o Use this option for specifying frequencies >= 1Hz.
o Sampling Frequency
 Data sampling frequency (in Hz) for acquiring SAA data.
Infrequent Sampling
o Use this option for specifying frequencies < 1 Hz.
o Sample Every:
 Number of hours between samples.
For example, if the ‘Sampling Frequency’ is 10 Hz and an average 100 samples per 60 second interval
is selected, then make sure that ‘Go to sleep periodically’ (not ‘Sample at constant rate’) is set. The
averaging value should be set to 100 (see Section 6.4.2 ‘SAA Setup | Averaging / AIA Mode’), the
‘Awake Interval’ should be at least 10 sec to allow for enough samples to be averaged per interval,
and the ‘Sleep Interval’ should be 60 minus the value of the ‘Sample Every’ parameter.
SAA Setup | Displacement and Tilt Alarms
This option allows the user to set alarms that are activated whenever the horizontal displacement of
any part of a vertical SAA (or the vertical displacement of any part of a horizontal SAA) exceeds some
user-defined limit, or whenever any of the SAA's accelerometers exceed some pre-defined limits.


Select the ‘SAA Setup | Displacement and Tilt Alarms’ menu item.
The window will open requesting to select an individual SAA or all:
Figure 6.72: Choose one or all available SAAs.


After selection, click ‘OK’.
The window in Figure 6.74 will open.
o Displacement Alarms
o Triggers an alarm if the displacement of an SAA goes beyond the specified
value.
o The values are in mm from either ‘Straight’ or ‘Base Reference’.
December 2014
135

o
o
If ‘Base Reference’ is chosen, then a valid XYZ Cartesian “Text” file as
the base reference for the SAA must be selected.
o The XYZ Cartesian test file can be created from the ‘Set Displacement and Tilt
Alarms’ dialog by clicking the ‘Save New Base Reference’ button, or it could
have been previously created by selecting the ‘File | Save text snapshot of
SAA data’ (Section 6.2.7) menu item.
Tilt Alarms
o Trigger an alarm if the acceleration of one or more of the SAA sensors goes
beyond the specified range of values.
o Values can be set for Upper and Lower X, Y, or Z Accelerations.
Notifications
o A sound can be played if an alarm occurs.
o An email can be sent.
 Click ‘Email Settings’ to set this feature up.
Figure 6.73: ‘Email Settings’ for Displacement and Tilt Alarms.
o
136
Joint Range for Alarms
o Specify a joint range for the SAA over which the above alarm settings apply.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.74: ‘Set Displacement and Tilt Alarms’ window with parameters for controlling whether or not to use
displacement and / or tilt alarms, and what the limits for those alarms should be.
6.4.8.1 Displacement Alarms
If displacement alarms are being used and a single scalar displacement is specified for the limit, a
yellow ring appears around the portion of each SAA where the maximum deflection is occurring. The
radius of the ring corresponds to the scalar value entered in the ‘Set Displacement and Tilt Alarms’
dialog (ex: “50.0” in Figure 6.75).
If any portion of an SAA goes beyond the prescribed radius limit, the color of the ring changes from
yellow to red, and warning text appears on the window.
December 2014
137
Figure 6.75: SAARecorder indicating a displacement alarm condition. In this case, the endpoints of all three SAAs have
moved beyond the alarm radius limit.
If SAA displacement along a particular axis is more of a concern, a vector value for the displacement
limit instead of a magnitude limit can be specified.
6.4.8.2 Vector Alarms
Vectors are entered as 2 or 3 comma-separated values. If 2 values are used, it is assumed that these
correspond to the maximum displacements along the X and Y axes. If 3 values are used it is assumed
that these correspond to the maximum displacements along the X, Y, and Z axes. Setting to zero any
vector component for the maximum displacement indicates that no displacement alarm exists in that
direction. For example, if the displacement limit is specified as 15, 0, 0 mm then an alarm would occur
if the SAA moved more than 15 mm from vertical (or from its reference shape) in the X-axis direction.
6.4.8.3 Tilt Alarms
If tilt alarms are being used, the SAA segment that exceeds the alarm limits the most is colored red
(for example see Figure 6.76). If the SAA is colored red anyway, then the segment that exceeds the
alarm limits the most is colored yellow instead.
138
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.76: Screen shot showing how SAARecorder indicates a tilt alarm condition.
If monitoring alarms for certain segments of an SAA is desired, the user can specify which segments
to use by entering a valid ‘Joint Range for Alarms’ in the field at the bottom of the ‘Set Displacement
and Tilt Alarms’ dialog. Joint 0 is assumed to be at the reference end of the SAA. To monitor all joints,
enter ‘All’ in the field.
SAA Setup | Piezometer Options
This option is available when using one or more of Measurand’s SAAPZ piezometer sensors. It displays
the window shown in Figure 6.77.
The ‘Piezo Output’ window can be specified to be in kPa (kilopascals), Digits, or as the measured
frequency of the piezometer sensor(s). Also, there is an option to choose how the pressure in kPa is
to be calculated. The default method uses the polynomial calibration coefficients for the device, but
the linear calibration coefficients can be used instead by modifying the settings in the ‘Piezometer
Calculation Mode’ control.
December 2014
139
Figure 6.77: ‘Piezo output’ window for controlling the output from Measurand’s piezometer sensors.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Constrain SAA Endpoint
This option allows the user to specify the height (Z-axis position) of the endpoint of the SAA in a
window similar to that shown in Figure 6.78. It is only available when the SAAs are being operated in
Near Horizontal (2-D) Mode, see Section 6.4.4 (‘SAA Setup | Mode’),
When the user elects to constrain both ends of an SAA in 2-D mode, angular corrections are applied
to each of the SAA’s joints. The amount of angular correction applied is the same for each joint, and
is determined using numerical methods in application to ensure that the endpoint height matches the
value specified by the user.
Figure 6.78: ‘Constrain Endpoint Position of SAA’ window used for specifying the endpoint height of an SAA in 2-D
mode. Useful for situations in which both ends of the SAA are constrained.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Turn on / off section of SAA
This option should be selected if there are one or more segments of an SAA near either end that is
not being used.
140
December 2014
SAA Software
For example, if a hole was only 65 feet deep but the SAA was 80 feet long (80 one foot segments),
then it would make sense to turn off the last two octets (i.e. the last 16 feet) using this option (Figure
6.79).
Figure 6.79: Window for selecting which SAA segments to turn on or off.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Straighten section of SAA
This menu option should be used if there are one or more segments of the SAA that have become
damaged in some way, and it is necessary to still get data from the rest of the SAA. Checking this
option for an SAA segment makes that segment “straight”. This means it will have the same tilt as the
adjoining segment closer to the reference side of the SAA (Figure 6.80).
Figure 6.80: ‘Straighten SAA Selections’ window for selecting which SAA segments to make “straight”.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Enable / Disable magnetometer twist correction
When ‘Magnetometer Twist Correct’ is enabled for any two magnetometers in an SAA, any difference
in axial rotation (rotation about the long axis of the SAA) between those two magnetometers is
assumed to vary linearly. The linear twist profile between the two magnetometers is used to apply
"twist corrections" to the accelerometer data between the two magnetometers.
If there are accelerometers situated between one end of an SAA and an enabled magnetometer, any
linear twist variation modeled by enabled magnetometers within the SAA is assumed to vary linearly
beyond the outermost magnetometers. So in effect the linear twist profile is extrapolated to the
accelerometers in the outermost segments.
December 2014
141
Twist corrections can be disabled for an entire SAA by disabling the magnetometer twist correction
for each available magnetometer.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Orientation sensor option
This function is for magnetometer SAAs only. It allows the user to specify whether or not to use true
north or magnetic north, and if true north, asks what the magnetic declination is at the current
location.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Hardware Triggering
This function is used to select how the clock and record data inputs will be used to trigger and save
data samples. Selecting this menu option brings up the window shown in Figure 6.81.



Enable hardware triggering for all SAAs
o If using a TTL-level clock signal on pin 4 of the DB-9 connector on the SAAR Interface
Box to trigger SAA data.
Enable hardware control for saving of raw data files
o If using pin 3 of the DB-9 connector on the SAAR Interface Box to signal when raw
data should be saved.
o It is necessary to specify a serial port for the DB-9 connector on the SAAR Interface
Box.
o If using a SAAR Interface Box, it should not be necessary to change this port, as it is
set by Measurand during factory installation. (See Appendix F)
Raw data file name prefix
o Is used to provide a name for any data that is automatically saved whenever the
'record data' line (pin 3) goes from low to high.
Figure 6.81: ‘Hardware Triggering’ window.
SAA Setup | Advanced | Use long time stamps
When turned on, this function affects raw data. It will record time and date in long form (YYYY:MM:DD
HH:MM:SS). 'File | Export raw data to text' will also be affected.
142
December 2014
SAA Software
6.5 Data and Graphs
Figure 6.82: View of the ‘Data and Graphs’ drop down menu.
Data and Graphs | Raw Data
Raw accelerometer outputs (in A to D counts) can be viewed for any given SAA subsection by selecting
this menu option. This brings up a window similar to that shown in Figure 6.83.
Figure 6.83: Raw data for an SAA subsection (i.e. octet).
Data and Graphs | Numeric Data
Each of the three orthographic views has scaling numerals listed along its border. These numbers
indicate position within the window in mm or inches. Also, data for joint positions, angles,
accelerations, and temperature are available. Joint angles (rarely used) are the “bend” angles
between segments.
Joint position (X, Y, Z), rotation (RX, RY), and acceleration (Acc. X, Acc. Y, and Acc. Z) are all obtained
from the accelerometer data over the active length of the SAA. Temperature data are also available
at SAA joints associated with temperature sensors (every 8 segments).
December 2014
143
Figure 6.84: Numeric data for an SAA.
Data and Graphs | Graph Data
An SAA's data can be graphed by using this menu item. This brings up the window in Figure 6.85 that
allows the user to choose what SAA data to graph. Position, joint bend angles, acceleration, or
temperature can be graphed as a function of time. The graph shown in Figure 6.86 is an example of
position data of an SAA vs. time.
Figure 6.85: Window prompting user to enter what data they would like to graph.
144
December 2014
SAA Software






SAA
o Select the SAA to graph.
Type of Data to Graph
o Select the type of data to graph:
 Position
 Bend Angles
 Acceleration
 Temperature
Vertex Number
o Select a vertex.
Axis to Graph
o Select an axis.
Add
o Once all choices are made, click to add to list to graph.
Remove
o Remove configuration from list.
Figure 6.86: Example graph for X-axis position of joints 1, 2, 3, and 4 of an SAA.

Graph Options
o Allows the user to select ranges for the graph axes.
December 2014
145
Figure 6.87: ‘Graph Options’ window for ‘File | Graph Data’.


Save to File
o Allows the user to save the contents of the graph to a “Text” file.
Alarm Setup
o Allows the user to setup Real-Time Alarms.
Figure 6.88: ‘Real-Time Alarm Limits’ window for the current graph.
Data and Graphs | View snapshot of SAA data
This menu function is used to get a graphical representation of the shape of the SAA.
In 3D mode, it produces XZ and YZ plots of SAA shape, and in 2D mode it produces an XZ plot of SAA
shape.
146
December 2014
SAA Software
1. After choosing this menu item, a file navigation window will open, find the snapshot file that
was saved and select it.
2. The window shown in Figure 6.89 will open.
3. See Section 6.2.7 for more information on this window.
Figure 6.89: Snapshot view of SAA data.
Data and Graphs | Vertical Displacements Relative to Reference SAA Shape
Quite often there is a requirement to monitor changes in SAA data in real-time, or to periodically
check an SAA from time-to-time to see if it has changed shape relative to some reference pose.
The following steps should be taken to do this:
1. Make sure that the SAA is powered for a consistent length of time prior to taking any
measurements.
2. Save a reference shape for the SAA by selecting the ‘File | Save text snapshot of SAA data’
menu item.
 This will prompt the user for the name of a “Text” file. It will then record the current
shape of the SAA in the “Text” file specified.
3. Click on the ‘View | View Displacements Relative to Reference SAA Shape’ menu item.
 This will prompt the user for the name of the “Text” file that will be used as the
reference SAA shape.
 Enter the filename specified for saving the text snapshot in Step 2 above.
4. Relative SAA displacements will appear in two windows similar to those shown in Figure 6.90
and Figure 6.91.
December 2014
147
Figure 6.90: X-axis Barchart of relative displacements for an SAA. Displacements are relative to a previously saved
text snapshot file (saved with the ‘File | Save text snapshot of SAA data’ menu item).
Figure 6.91: Y-axis Barchart of relative displacements.
6. The ‘Graph Options’ button gives the user options to change some graph settings. The
window in Figure 6.92 opens.
148
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.92: ‘Graph Displacement Options’ window.
7. Make selections and click ‘OK’.
 Reference XYZ Text File
o The current XYZ “Text” file being monitored.
 Graph Type
o Barchart
o Line Graph
 Show Grid Lines
o Turn graph grid lines on or off.
 Automatic Scaling
o When un-checked the min and max fields become editable.
 Y-axis Type
o Distance from Reference.
o SAA Elevation.
 X & Y mins and maxs
o When manually scaling fill in these fields.
Data and Graphs | View +X-mark Roll Angle
This menu item can be used to display the roll angle of the +X-mark of an individual SAA segment. It
can be useful in cases where it is necessary to maintain the roll angle of the SAA at some known value
(such as when scanning an inclined borehole). When the user clicks this menu item they are prompted
to select a particular SAA segment (see Figure 6.93).
December 2014
149
Figure 6.93: The prompt window for selecting a particular SAA segment for which to display the roll angle of the X-mark.
After selecting a particular segment, a window similar to Figure 6.94 appears indicating the roll angle
of the selected segment. A roll angle of 0 degrees corresponds to the +X-mark of the selected segment
pointing upwards, or having its +X-axis acceleration maximized for its given inclination.
The color of the roll angle graphic



GREEN
o if the roll angle is within +/- 1.0 degrees of zero
YELLOW
o if the roll angle is within +/- 5.0 degrees of zero
RED
o if the roll angle is more than +/- 5.0 degrees from zero
Figure 6.94: Roll angle graphic colored RED indicating that the X-mark of the selected segment is more than +/- 5.0
degrees from zero.
150
December 2014
SAA Software
Data and Graphs | Magnetometer data
The ‘Magnetometer Data’ menu function presents a window that displays the locations of any
magnetometers present in the SAA, along with their headings (in degrees) and their measured
magnetic field strengths (see Figure 6.95).
The magnetic field strength of SAA magnetometers is approximately one when used at Measurand's
factory in Eastern Canada, but will tend to vary depending on where in the world the SAA is. The
magnetic field strength is generally used as a measure of potential magnetic interference, such as
from nearby ferrous materials, or from electromagnetic effects.
In the absence of magnetic interference, the magnetic field strengths of all SAA magnetometers
should agree well with one another (typically within 5 percent). If one or more magnetometers appear
to be affected by magnetic interference, the twist corrections for those magnetometers should be
disabled (see Section 6.4.13 ‘SAA Setup | Advanced | Enable / Disable magnetometer twist
correction’).
Figure 6.95: ‘Magnetometer Data’.
Data and Graphs | Get vibration data
Measurand’s SAAs can also be used to acquire vibration data, when they are operated in a special
‘vibration mode’, with Measurand’s optional ‘Vibration Module’. When operated in vibration mode,
an SAA typically only provides acceleration data at one or two joints. By providing less data, the SAA
is able to operate at a much higher sampling rate, making vibration analysis possible.
Note: If the Vibration Module has not been purchased from Measurand then only limited
features are available. Features such as exporting and saving vibration file data is only
available with the module.
1. In order to view vibration data for one or more parts of an SAA, go to the ‘Data and Graphs | Get
Vibration Data’ menu item.
2. Select what type of vibration data graph desired.
December 2014
151
 Acceleration vs. Time
 Acceleration vs. Frequency
3. Select which part(s) of the SAA the vibration data is for, as shown in Figure 6.96.
 Each 8 segments is considered a subarray.
 This window lists two subarrays.
Figure 6.96: Select what type of vibration data and which part(s) of the SAA to view for vibration monitoring.
Note: Typically, only every 8th joint of a Model 2 SAA is available for vibration monitoring.
For field SAAs (SAAFs), the vibration sampling rate is inversely proportional to the number
of SAA joints viewed. A sample size for the FFT (when viewing “Acceleration vs.
Frequency”) is also chosen in this window; the optimal value for this will depend upon the
nature of the vibration, time available, and the noise requirements for the test. Any sample
size between 256 and 100,000 can be chosen for the FFT.
6.5.8.1 Acceleration vs. Time Graph
4. Click ‘OK’.
5. A ‘Choose Accelerometer View Options’ window will open, see Figure 6.97.
152
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.97: ‘Choose Accelerometer View Options’.

Display Total Vibration
o View total vibration for SAA segment(s).
o Total vibration is the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual x, y and
z vibrations.
 Display Individual Vibrations
o View individual X, Y and / or Z –axis accelerations for SAA segment(s).
6. A ‘Vibration vs. Time’ graph will appear, see Figure 6.98.
Figure 6.98: ‘Vibration vs. Time Graph’ window.
7. For more information on the ‘Graph Options’ and ‘Alarm Setup’ window features, see Section
6.5.3.
December 2014
153
6.5.8.2 Acceleration vs. Frequency Graph
4. Select the sample size for FFTs, see Figure 6.99.
Figure 6.99: ‘Choose Vibration Data’ window with FFT sample size text box.
5. Click ‘OK’.
6. After the FFT buffer has filled up, an FFT vibration plot of acceleration (m/s2) vs. frequency will
appear in a window similar to that shown in Figure 6.100.
7. To see what the maximum vibrations are over a period of time, check the ‘View Max. Vibrations’
check box in the lower left corner of the ‘Acceleration vs. Frequency’ window (see Figure 6.101).
 The line of maximum vibrations vs. frequency will appear at the same time as the
current line of acceleration vs. frequency.
8. For more information on the ‘Graph Options’ and ‘Alarm Setup’ window features, see Section
6.5.3.
Figure 6.100: Graph of acceleration vs. frequency for the SAA joint closest to the near end of the SAA.
154
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.101: ‘Acceleration vs. Frequency Graph’ with Max Vibrations ON.
6.5.8.3 Save File
There are various ways to save vibration data to file. A window similar to that shown in Figure 6.102
will appear.
The ‘Choose Vibration File Type’ window provides three alternatives for saving vibration data. They
are as follows:
Figure 6.102: Window prompting user to select a type of vibration output file.

Save to raw data (*.rsa) file
o This option allows the data file to be played back later.
 Save to text data (*.txt) file
o Save vibrations data as a function of time in text format.
 Save snapshot image of vibration graph
o This option saves an exact replica of the ‘Vibration Graph’ window, such as the one
shown in Figure 6.98.
o The output image file is saved using the Windows Bitmap (BMP) format.
December 2014
155
6.6 Viewing SAAs and SAA Data (Display Options)
Figure 6.103: View of the ‘Display Options’ drop down menu.
Display Options | Number of Views
By default, SAARecorder splits the viewing window into four quadrants - three orthographic viewing
windows, and one perspective viewing window in the lower-right corner. It is also possible to have
just a single perspective viewing window.
Figure 6.104: ‘Number of Views’ on screen selection.
Display Options | SAA Thickness
The displayed thickness of the onscreen SAAs can be changed by selecting this menu item. This is
useful when zooming out to see very long SAAs.
Changing the displayed thickness does not affect any of the data values output from SAARecorder.
156
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.105: ‘Set SAA Thickness’ window.
Display Options | SAA Display Color
The displayed color of the onscreen SAAs can be changed by selecting the 'Display Options | SAA
display color' menu item. This is useful when zooming out to see numerous SAAs. Changing the
displayed color does not affect any of the data values output from SAARecorder.
Figure 6.106: Window to select a color for the entire SAA or just subarrays (Octets).
December 2014
157
Figure 6.107: Color options for SAAs or Subarrays.
Display Options | Magnify Vertical Displacement
Selecting this menu option allows the user to apply a scaling factor to the horizontal motion of any
vertical SAAs that might be present. If the SAA is being operated horizontally in ‘2-D Mode’ (see
Section 6.4.4).
The scaling factor applied is for visualization purposes only; it does not affect the actual numeric data
in any way. If the scaling factor is set to any value other than 1, a warning message will flash in yellow
text on the window to indicate the value of the horizontal (or vertical) scaling factor.
Figure 6.108: ‘Magnify Vertical Displacement’ window.
Display Options | Zooming In and Out
6.6.5.1 Zoom In
Any given view can be zoomed in on by first selecting the view (left-clicking on the desired viewing
window) and then pressing the '+' (plus) key, or selecting the ‘Display Options | Zoom In’ menu option,
or scrolling upwards with the mouse’s scroll wheel.
6.6.5.2 Zoom Out
Likewise, any given view can be zoomed out from by first selecting the viewing window and then
pressing the '-' (minus) key, or selecting the ‘Display Options | Zoom Out’ menu option, or scrolling
downwards with the mouse’s scroll wheel.
158
December 2014
SAA Software
6.6.5.3 Zoom to Fit
Automatically zoom and pan all of the currently active views by clicking on the ‘Display Options |
Zoom to Fit’ menu item, or by pressing the ‘F’ key.
Display Options | View Data Rate
Selecting this option allows the user to view the current data rates for each of the SAAs connected to
the PC (see Figure 6.109).
This option can be toggled on and off.
Figure 6.109: View of data rates for each of the SAAs.
Display Options | Reset view settings
Clicking on this menu item or pressing <CTRL+D> resets the current view to its default zoom level and
position.
Display Options | Advanced | Change frame rate
Clicking on this menu item brings up the window in Figure 6.110 where the frame update rate can be
toggled up or down in Hertz.
Figure 6.110: Found in menu 'Display Options | Advanced'.
Display Options | Advanced | Show Inclination Warning Text
Selecting this option allows the user to view any inclination warnings for each of the SAAs connected
to the PC.
This option can be toggled on and off.
December 2014
159
Figure 6.111: When the inclination warnings are on, they appear in Yellow text.
Mouse Feature | Panning the View
Pan any of the views by first selecting the view (left-clicking on the desired viewing window) and then
right-clicking and dragging the mouse in the viewing window.
6.7 Diagnostics
Figure 6.112: View of the ‘Diagnostics’ drop down menu.
Diagnostic Tests
A number of diagnostic tests are available in SAARecorder to test the performance of an SAA and
ensure that it is functioning correctly:
Figure 6.113: ‘Diagnostic Tests’ Window.
160
December 2014
SAA Software
6.7.1.1 Voltage / Current Check
For SAAs that are equipped with an SAATop module in their top segment (virtually all SAAs produced
since 2011), this diagnostic test is available to measure the voltage, current and temperature of the
top segment of the SAA. The “top segment” is immediately above the “sensorized zone” on a vertical
SAA.
Figure 6.114: ‘Voltage / Current Check’.



Voltage
o The voltage level is measured at the top (cable end) of the SAA.
o The message to the right of this box informs the user if the voltage levels are within
normal range or not.
Current
o The amount of current that the SAA is using.
o The message to the right of this box informs the user if the current use is normal or not.
Top Temperature
o The temperature measured at the top of the SAA.
If the actual measured voltage level is outside the nominal range, or if the current differs by more
than 10 percent from the expected nominal current level, then this is usually an indication that
something is wrong, contact Measurand (Appendix K).
6.7.1.2 Total Acceleration Check
The total acceleration check computes the vector sum of the acceleration at each segment, and
presents the result on a graph. Any total acceleration observed outside a 0.93 to 1.07 G range is
usually indicative of some sort of problem, such as a broken wire, damaged sensor, etc.
The vector sum of the accelerations measured in each segment of an SAA should be quite close to 1.0
G.
December 2014
161
Figure 6.115: ‘Total Acceleration Check’.
6.7.1.3 Sensor Noise Test
This test is only available when the SAA is NOT in AIA mode.
It provides a measure of the typical sample-to-sample variation for each accelerometer sensor of an
SAA. Typical values for this noise variation should be in the 4 to 24 counts range.
Keep in mind however, that the surrounding environment should be completely free from vibration
of any sort, as even someone walking by the SAA will tend to produce sensor fluctuations above the
24 counts level.
Figure 6.116: ‘Sensor Noise Test’.
162
December 2014
SAA Software
6.7.1.4 Data Diagnostics
Provides a summary of any communication errors (missed samples) that have been noted since the
application has started collecting data from a particular SAA, as well as the minimum, typical, and
maximum data latencies (i.e. length of time required to receive individual data samples).
Keep in mind that the data latency will vary substantially depending on whether or not AIA mode is
being used, and if AIA mode is being used, what the averaging level is (i.e. the greater the averaging,
the longer the latency).
Some SAAs may have an initial communications error (i.e. missed sample) upon power-up. This is
normal and not a cause for concern. Also, for wireless serial links, it is usually impossible to have 100
percent error-free transmission, so for wireless links it is normal to see the missed samples quantity
increase for each octet slowly over time.
Figure 6.117: ‘Data Diagnostics’.
6.7.1.5 Communications Check
This check attempts data collection with the far-most octet of the SAA at the following baud rates:
38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps, 230400 bps.
If the test fails at any of the baud rates, it is an indication that there is a problem with SAA
communications. For example one of the RS-485 lines running to the SAA might not be tightly screwed
in, or the SAA cable could be too long.
If there is a problem with this check, it could still be possible to get good data from the SAA if the baud
rate is kept at the lowest possible value of 38400 bps. However, to ensure reliability, any deficiencies
should be corrected if possible. This check is not available for wireless installations.
December 2014
163
Figure 6.118: ‘Communications Check’.
6.7.1.6 SAA Bend Angles
This Diagnostic test provides an output of the bend angles at each SAA joint, as measured in terms of
the radius of curvature (either m or ft, depending on the units used).
Figure 6.119: SAA bend angles expressed as a radius of curvature (in m or ft) at each joint.
164
December 2014
SAA Software
6.8 Calibrations
Figure 6.120: View of the Calibrations drop down menu.
In general, it should not be necessary to calibrate the SAA instrument. All of the necessary calibrations
are performed at Measurand’s factory, and generally do not require re-calibration.
In certain instances however, it might be necessary to re-calibrate, or at least check the SAA’s
calibration. The calibrations that are sometimes necessary are listed below.
Calibrations | Roll calibration
The roll calibration of an SAA (i.e. the calibration that measures the rotational offsets of SAA segments
about the longitudinal axis) can be verified by laying the SAA straight on a smooth, flat surface and
selecting this menu item.
If a smooth, flat surface is not available, PVC pipe can be used to hold the SAA. A window similar to
that shown in Figure 6.121 appears, indicating what the current roll angle offsets are. These offsets
should be in the range of -10 degrees to +10 degrees. If they are outside of this range, please contact
Measurand (Appendix K).
Figure 6.121: ‘SAA Roll Calibration’ window. Bar graphs are used to depict the roll offset error at each of the SAA's
joints.
December 2014
165






Scale
o Vertical scale of this graph in degrees.
Start Segment for Calibration
o To do the roll calibration starting at the near segment of the SAA set the first box to “1”.
o To start at some other segment set the number at a greater number.
End Segment for Calibration
o Set to the number of segments in this SAA in order to roll calibrate to the far end.
o To roll calibrate a subsection of this SAA, set at a lower number.
Set First Joint Roll Offset to Zero
o Check this only if the X-mark on the SAA is physically aligned with the “up” axis.
Calculate New SAA Roll Angle Offsets
o Click to calculate new roll calibration offsets for this SAA.
Restore Factory Roll Angle Offsets
o Click to re-instate the factory roll calibration offsets for this SAA.
Figure 6.122: ‘Near End Roll Angle’.
Calibrations | 2D shape alignment (mixed (convergence) mode only)
This calibration should only be used if the SAAs are operating in 2-D Convergence (some segments
greater than 60 degrees from horizontal) mode.
It is used to acquire a starting orientation for the shape of the SAA, so that accurate 2-D measurements
can be made thereafter.
166
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 6.123: Window used for aligning initial 2-D shape.
Note: Click the ‘Calculate SAA 2-D Shape Alignment’ button in Figure 6.123 to determine
the initial alignment of the 2-D shape. This will increase the accuracy of subsequent 2-D
measurements, provided that the shape of the SAA does not change significantly.
Calibrations | Calibrate piezometer offset
This calibration is used to establish a new zero pressure offset for one or more Measurand SAAPZ
piezometers that are being monitored using SAARecorder.
After the menu item is selected, a window confirms which piezometer should be calibrated (if there
is more than one) and then the zero pressure offset calibration takes place immediately after that.
The pressure output of the piezometer that was calibrated should read 0 kPa immediately after
calibration.
Note: This is useful if the user has a very large raw data file, but wish to concentrate on
only a small section of the file. Use the ‘Start of File’ or ‘End of File’ check boxes if the user
wish to specify a time corresponding to the start of the file or the end of the file
respectively.
Calibrations | Advanced | Horizontal Calibration
This calibration is used to establish a horizontal reference for an SAA that is being used to make
horizontal 2-D measurements. If survey points are available for the surface on which the SAA is being
calibrated, these can also be used to obtain a more exact horizontal reference for the SAA.
December 2014
167
It should be noted which side of the SAA is facing up, for example is the X-mark facing upwards.
Figure 6.124: Window used for performing a horizontal calibration on an SAA.



Import Floor Survey Data (Optional)
o Import survey data from file. The use of survey data is optional.
o If no survey data is provided then it is assumed that the SAA is perfectly horizontal.
Restore Factory Horizontal Calibrations
o Restore the factory calibrations for this SAA.
Do Horizontal Calibrations
o Perform the horizontal calibration for this SAA.
o If survey data was provided, then the SAA will be calibrated to match the survey data.
o Otherwise, the SAA will be calibrated to be horizontal.
6.8.4.1 Floor Survey Text File
The “Floor Survey Text” file should be similar to the following:
Floor Survey Text File
Units: mm
X, Z
Data begins;
0.0, 0.01
300.0, 0.05
600.0, 0.05
900.0, 0.09
1200.0, 0.06
Etc.
Where the X-axis dimension corresponds to the long direction of the floor and the Z-axis dimension
corresponds to the vertical elevation of the floor and has to be parallel to the gravity vector.
The survey data is only used to calculate the inclination of the individual links. Any offsets in the Z-axis
dimension (x=0, z=0) are not considered.
The data can be in Millimeters (mm), Meters (m), Inches (in) or Feet (ft).
168
December 2014
SAA Software
The survey data is assumed to start at the near reference end (where the cable is) and extend to the
far end of the SAA.
Calibrations | Advanced | Vertical Calibration
This calibration is used to straighten the SAA.
Calibrations | Advanced | Load previous vertical calibration
This menu item allows the user to select a previously set Vertical Calibration or re-establish factory
defaults.
Figure 6.125: Window to select calibration.
Calibrations | Advanced |Join SAAs together
This option should only be used by trained Measurand personnel to combine (in Software and
Hardware) two or more SAAs into a single SAA.
6.9 Troubleshooting & Support (Help)
Figure 6.126: View of the ‘Help’ drop down menu.
December 2014
169
Help | About SAARecorder
Clicking on the ‘Help | About SAARecorder’ menu item opens a window similar to Figure 6.127
providing SAARecorder version number, Copyright and a link for updates.
Figure 6.127: ‘About SAARecorder’ window.
Help| Documentation
Clicking on the ‘Help | Documentation’ menu item gives the choice between SAARecorder
Documentation and SAACR_Raw2Data Manual. Choosing either option will open a PDF.
Help | Keyboard Shortcuts
Clicking on the ‘Help | Keyboard Shortcuts’ menu item opens a window similar to Figure 6.128
providing a list of keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 6.128: ‘Keyboard Shortcuts’.
Help | Tutorial Videos
Clicking on the ‘Help | Tutorial Videos’ menu item opens the Measurand website on the Tutorial
Videos page.
Other ways of connecting SAAs
Communications | Search for serial SAAs (Section 6.3.3)
Communications | Advanced | Network | Search for network SAAs (Section 6.3.6)
170
December 2014
SAA Software
7. SAAView
SAAView is used to visualize 3D or 2D data from ShapeAccelArrays (SAAs). Typically the data are
generated in the field, stored in a Campbell Scientific Data Logger then retrieved manually,
automatically, and / or wirelessly. Arriving raw data are translated into readable form in
SAACR_raw2data and then opened in SAAView.
SAAView may also be used to view exported files from SAARecorder, the “real-time” 3D viewer for
SAA. SAAView functions include graphical viewing and export as images or data files in various
formats.
SAAView may also be used to view non-SAA piezometer, earth pressure cell, or strain gauge data if it
is converted through SAACR_raw2data from Measurand’s SAAPZ or from “third party” devices.
SAAView opens files of Cartesian data, named “multi_saa_allcart.mat”. These files hold data from
multiple SAAs in binary form. One SAA at a time may be viewed.
It is possible to view SAA data along with non-SAA data in the same graph using the ‘GraphAll+’
function (Section 7.3.3) of SAAView.
7.1 Running SAAView
When SAAView is started the window in Figure 7.1 opens and gives the user a choice of four possible
locations to pull data from. SAAView is looking to open a “*.mat” file of converted Cartesian data.
Figure 7.1: ‘Initial’ SAAView window.
SAARecorder Selection
Selecting this allows the user to open a project that would have already been exported from
SAARecorder using the “Export to SAAView” selection (Section 6.2.6.1). The default location of
SAARecorder data is ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAARecorder\Data’, but it will not necessarily be in that
folder.
CR Logger Selection
Selecting this allows the user to open a project that would have already been processed in
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5). The default location for logger data is in ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAA3D\logger_data\[project name]’, but a user’s data will not necessarily be there… i.e. it’s
December 2014
171
possible a user could be using a different folder. Select a “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file avoiding any
such files with “*_1*”… “*_n*” or “_root”.
DL1_Logger Selection
This is for users with a Legacy DL1 Data Logger. Selecting this allows the user to open a project from
a Measurand DL1 Logger, not a Campbell Scientific Data Logger.
Server Selection
Selecting this allows the user to open a project that is stored on the Measurand server. A password
and username will be required and provided by Measurand. The window in Figure 7.2 will open
allowing the user to choose a project previously stored on the server.
Figure 7.2: The window for retrieving files from the Measurand Server.
7.1.4.1 New Project button
After clicking this button a User Name and Password Field will open, see Figure 7.3. Enter username
and password for a Project not already on the list to the left. A project will not be seen on the list if it
has not been previously selected and inserted.
Figure 7.3: ‘New Project’ button clicked, Username and Password required.
172
December 2014
SAA Software
After entering User Name and Password, click ‘Submit’, a text field will appear with the Username
defaulted in. This field can be edited, whatever name appears in the text box when the ‘Insert Name’
button is clicked will be the name of the file displayed in the window on the left.
Once the ‘Insert Name’ button has been clicked and the file name has appeared in the left window, it
is now time to click one of three buttons to download the data; ‘Incremental Download’ (Section
7.1.4.4), ‘Download All Files’ (Section 7.1.4.5) or to see what data is available for the current project
file click ‘Get Server Listing’ (Section 7.1.4.6).
Figure 7.4: 'Submit' button clicked, project name appears.
Figure 7.5: The file "project" has been moved over to the left window, though the data is not yet downloaded.
If the Project required is in the list to the left of the window, select the Project and click one of the
following buttons. In reaction to all but the first button, SAAView will open with the selected Project
(see Section 7.2).
December 2014
173
7.1.4.2 Delete Name Button
Delete the project name from the selection list.
7.1.4.3 Open Saved Project Button
Open the selected project without downloading (must have been downloaded previously).
7.1.4.4 Incremental Download Button
FAST: Download the LATEST DATA ONLY, and concatenate it to saved data for the selected project
and then open the project. If there is no new data to download, the little message box in Figure
7.6 will appear.
Figure 7.6: The message box that appears when there is no new data to download.
7.1.4.5 Download All Files Button
SLOW: Downloads ALL FILES from the selected project. The Project then opens with the ‘Sparse
View’ window open, see Section 7.2.2.5.
7.1.4.6 Get Server Listing Button
View the files available for download, for the selected file.
Figure 7.7: The warning that appears when the data is from a Measurand's Legacy DL1 Logger.
7.2 Main Window Overview
Once a project and files have been selected, the window in Figure 7.8 or Figure 7.9 will open.
174
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.8: The ‘Main’ SAAView window of a vertical SAA (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.9: The ‘Main’ SAAView window of a horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
SAAs and their previews will appear. By selecting an SAA from the small green list-box on the left, the
pre-filtered and unfiltered previews will display for the selected SAA in the lower portion of the
window. To perform additional filtering click the green ‘FilterSAA’ button (see Section 7.2.4). To set
Azimuth click the green ‘AzimuthSAA’ button (see Section 7.2.5). If the SAA selected is horizontal then
the ‘AzimuthSAA’ button will not appear as seen in Figure 7.9.
December 2014
175
Note: The scales in these graphs are in inches and feet or millimeters and meters. The units
can be changed by clicking ‘Settings’ on the ‘Main’ window and selecting ‘Metric / English’.
The ‘QuickView’ button gives a rotatable 3 dimensional view of the first and last frames of SAA data
(a frame is one sample of data in time). To set alarms, for either SAAs or non-SAA sensors, click the
‘AlarmSet’ button (see Section 7.2.7), for a summary of the SAA alarms click the ‘View’ button beside
the ‘AlarmSet’ button.
The large green list-box in the top right of the window shows the filter details of the SAA selected. The
following list is a breakdown and description of columned fields:
Ser#
Serial number of the selected SAA.
Avg
Averaging depth.
Skip
Show data only at this interval.
SpkFilt
Spike filter is on or off.
Active%
Percentage along the length of the SAA that is active.
Azi
Incoming Azimuth degrees from previous program (i.e. either
SAACR_raw2data, SAARecorder, or SAACR_Raw2DataConfiguration (part
of SAACR_FileGenerator)).
Aza
Additional azimuth degree set within SAAView.
Once all changes are made, if any, the unfiltered or filtered data can be viewed by clicking either the
‘ViewUnFiltered’ or ‘ViewFiltered’ buttons respectively (See Section 7.3).
Note: The ‘Main’ window is a PREVIEW of data.
Non-SAA sensors, if any are present, will state the number of sensors present beside the type listed.
They are in the small yellow list-box on the left below the green SAA list-box. By clicking on a present
non-SAA sensor the large list-box on the right will turn yellow and populate with a list of all the nonSAA sensors of the type (i.e. PZ!, PZ3,…) selected on the left (see Figure 7.10). The pre-filtered and
unfiltered previews will display for the selected non-SAA sensors in the lower portion of the window.
The non-SAA sensors can be further filtered by clicking the now yellow ‘FilterSensor’ button (see
Section 7.2.3) and alarms can be set by clicking the ‘AlarmSet’ button (see Section 7.2.7).
176
December 2014
SAA Software
Non-SAAs are viewed along with SAA data in the ‘GraphAll+’ view, see Section 7.3.3. There is no other
way to view non-SAAs outside the ‘Main’ window.
Figure 7.10: The ‘Main’ SAAView window when a non-SAA has been selected (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). Note: the
variations are due to tidal water height, not unstable data.
Note: The ‘ViewFiltered’ and ‘ViewUnFiltered’ buttons do not enable viewing for non-SAAS.
If clicked they will open the last SAA selected.
December 2014
177
File Menu
Figure 7.11: The ‘File’ menu in the ‘Main’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz). Note: the variations are due to tidal
water height resulting in actual deformation, and do not represent unstable data.
7.2.1.1 Export Data
To export data use ‘ViewFiltered’ or ‘ViewUnFiltered’ buttons (Section 7.3) and select
‘Graphall(+Exports)’ menu item (Section 7.3.3).
7.2.1.2 Save image
Selecting this menu item will save a screen shot of the ‘Main’ window.
7.2.1.3 Delete SAA Filter File
Selecting this menu item will cause a window to open with a warning that this action will delete the
“Filter” file which will remove filtering for ALL SAAs. Selecting ‘Yes’ will remove “C:\Measurand
Inc\Saa3D\logger_files\[project file]\ArrayFilterSaa.mat”.
7.2.1.4 Delete Sensor Filter File
Selecting this menu item will cause a window to open with a warning that this action will delete the
“Filter” file which will remove filtering for ALL TYPES of non-SAAs. Selecting ‘Yes’ will remove
“C:\Measurand Inc\Saa3D\logger_files\[project file]\ArrayFilterSensor.mat”.
7.2.1.5 Delete Alarm File
Selecting this menu item will cause a window to open with a warning that this action will delete the
“Alarm” file which will remove alarms for ALL SAAs and non-SAA sensors. Selecting ‘Yes’ will remove
“C:\Measurand
Inc\Saa3D\logger_files\[project
file]\ArrayAlarmSaa.mat”
and
“ArrayAlarmSensor.mat”. (See Section 7.2.7)
7.2.1.6 Delete AutoCall File
Selecting this menu item will cause a window to open with a warning that this action will delete the
“Auto Call” file “C:\Measurand Inc\Saa3D\logger_files\[project file]\auto_call_settings.mat”. (See
Section 7.3.2.4)
178
December 2014
SAA Software
Settings Menu
Figure 7.12: The’ Settings’ menu in the ‘Main’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
7.2.2.1 Metric / English
Selecting this menu item will change all the measurements:
Meters <-> Feet
Millimeters <-> Inches
7.2.2.2 Edit Project Name
Selecting this menu item allows the user to edit the project name. Be aware, this does not change the
name of the project folder, just the project name in SAAView. It is recommended to copy the files over
to a new project folder and then change the project name to correspond.
Figure 7.13: The window to change a project’s name.
7.2.2.3 Elevation Offsets
Selecting this menu item, only when an SAA is selected, will cause a window to open, as seen in Figure
7.14, allowing the user to set the elevation of one end of each SAA. The application calculates the
other end automatically.
December 2014
179
Figure 7.14: The ‘Select Elevations’ window.
7.2.2.4 Auto Scale / Manual Scale
Selecting the ‘Manual Scale’ menu item causes a small window to open allowing the user to set the
scales for the deformation data, as shown in Figure 7.15.
Selecting the ‘Auto Scale’ menu item causes the application to automatically scale for the deformation
data.
Figure 7.15: The ‘Manual Scale’ window.
7.2.2.5 Change SparseView Settings
Large Files may result in the earliest 80% of the data being reduced to every nth frame (Unfiltered
preview / view / exports only). Selecting this menu item will cause a window to open allowing the
user to adjust SparseView settings. The number of frames of data can be adjusted as well as other
settings.
The ‘SparseView Settings’ window, as shown in Figure 7.16, will inform the user of the number of
frames of data in the current file for the particular SAA that was highlighted when this menu item was
selected.
When SparseView is active, early frames are thinned out in time to allow faster opening and prevent
PC crashes due to graphics or memory allocation limitations. SparseView only affects UnFiltered data
and UnFiltered exports.
180
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.16: ‘SparseView Settings’ window.
The choices available in SparseView are as follows:




Set NumFrames that will open SparseView
o Select the number of frames (samples) of data that will enable SparseView.
Force opening w/ SparseView ON
o Force opening with SparseView even if the number of frames is less than the frames
limit.
Try opening w/ SparseView OFF
o Try opening without SparseView (Program may crash).
Do not open the file at all
o Do not open this file. Select a different file.
The SAAs associated with the current project are listed in the little green box to the left of center near
the top of the window. Each SAA has a list of information noted in the large green box to the right of
center near the top of the window. To use the following buttons and to preview the data an SAA must
be selected from the small green box first. The application defaults to the top SAA of the list.
December 2014
181
FilterSensor Button
Figure 7.17: ‘Filter Sensor’ window, note the scale is in days and kPa (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
By selecting an available non-SAA sensor in the small yellow box on the left of the ‘Main’ window, the
green buttons available for the SAAs disappear and a yellow ‘FilterSensor’ button appears. Clicking
this button opens the window shown above in Figure 7.17. It allows the user to filter the data for each
sensor.
For details about how to use the window, see the next section (Section 7.2.4).
FilterSAA Button
Figure 7.18: The ‘Filter Settings’ window for vertical SAA (Project: large_shear).
182
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.19: The ‘Filter Settings’ window for a horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
The ‘FilterSAA’ button is used to remove outliers, customize averaging and select data display intervals
to speed up subsequent viewing.
Unfiltered (all) data show as black points: Filtered as blue circles: Deleted as grey points. Only blue
circle data are passed along for Filtered Viewing.
7.2.4.1 File Menu
Delete “Filter” File (see Section 7.2.1.3).
7.2.4.2 Settings Menu
Most settings can be made by clicking on a “--“ line or on a slider. Some settings require moving the
“--“ lines first to define a point, block or range. “Locking” a sensor will preserve its unique settings
even when settings of other sensors are changed, unlocked sensors all get the same (latest) settings.
7.2.4.3 Left Graph
Holding the left-click the user can drag the “--” lines where desired. Right clicking the “--” lines allow
the user to ‘Reset Limits’, this resets the lines to the default limits.
7.2.4.4 Right Graph – Right-Click Dashed Lines
Holding the left-click the user can drag the “--” lines where desired. Right clicking the “--” lines gives
the following menu options:
December 2014
183
Figure 7.20: Right Click menu (Project: large_shear).


184
Non-Single Mode
o In non-single mode, the user can select data at regular intervals (“skip” interval), filter out
“spikes”, and remove individual points or “blocks” of contiguous points. In any mode, the
user can select the portion of the SAA length to view. It can be used with SAA or non-SAA
data.
Single Mode:
o Passes only the selected points to the left graph (useful for selecting just a few points). As
seen in Figure 7.21, where two data points have been selected and show as a light blue
and a red line in the left graph.
o A legend will appear showing the selected times. The legend can be dragged around the
window.
o Left-click a “--” line in the left graph and drag the line to a desired point.
 Select Single
 Right-click the “--” line to choose that single point in time.
 De-Select Single
 Before moving the “--” line, right-click the “--” line to choose that single
point in time to de-select it.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.21: Two points selected for viewing, and the legend is movable (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.22: Three points selected for viewing in single mode (Project: horiz_pz_epc).



Delete Single
o Before moving the “--” line, the just selected single data point can be deleted.
Restore Single
o This option will restore a previously deleted data point.
Delete Block
o Create a block of time by sliding the left and right “--” lines by holding and dragging the
left-click. Right-click and select this menu item to delete the created block of time.
December 2014
185
Figure 7.23: The first section was deleted but can still be seen in grey in both graphs (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.24: The first section was deleted but can still be seen in grey in both graphs (Project: horiz_pz_epc).




186
Restore Block
o Right-click and select this menu item to restore the deleted block of time.
Skipinterval = Avg
o This option makes the skip interval equal to the average.
Skipinterval = LineSpacing
o This option makes the skip interval equal to the line spacing.
No Skip (All Active Pts)
o Selecting this option removes any skip intervals, all active points will be shown.
December 2014
SAA Software

No Skip, No Avg
o Removes all default and user-defined intervals and averaging.
Figure 7.25: ‘No Skip, No Average’ (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.26: ‘No average, no Skip’ (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
7.2.4.5 Sliders
The leftmost slider is used to select the vertex of an SAA to view, or a particular sensor within a sensor
type to view. For non-SAA sensors, it can be right-clicked to lock/unlock the sensor (to prevent it from
taking on settings from unlocked sensors). When a vertex is selected on the slider, the left graph will
show the vertex with a black grouping. The right graph will display that vertex deformation in more
detail.
December 2014
187
The right slider represents the depth of frame averaging. This is used to calculate the mean data and
set the default interval. The time interval can be changed from the default to minutes, seconds, hours,
days or months using the drop-down list below this slider.
7.2.4.6 Other Options
 FullScale checkbox - Check this box to enlarge the scale and see all the points, including those
removed by the spike filter.
 SpikeFilter radio button - Apply spike filtering to delete large departures from “normal” data
for the selected SAA. Turn off if “normal” data have unintended grey-out points.
AzimuthSAA Button
Figure 7.27: The 'AzimuthSAA Settings’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Azimuth is a rotation of the X and Y data about vertical (gravity). If zero, the data are in the XY
coordinate system of the SAA. Each SAA has an X-mark at its top and bottom. +X deformation pushes
the mark forward “ahead” of the SAA. Looking down, +Y is to the left of +X, as seen in XY square graph
in Figure 7.27.
The ‘AzimuthSAA’ button is not available for horizontal SAAs because there is no Y.
7.2.5.1 Left-Click Dashed Lines
The “--” lines are used to select the vertex of an SAA to view. To move them left click the “--” line in
either graph and drag it to the desired position.
7.2.5.2 Right-Click Dashed Lines
 AutoFind Max Deformation
o Selecting this option will cause the dashed line to move to the elevation with the
maximum deformation. See Figure 7.28.
 AutoAz at Selected Elev
o Selecting this option will adjust the Azimuth automatically so that the resultant
deformation at the selected elevation is in the +X direction only.
 Do Both
o Selecting this option will do both of the previous options at once.
188
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.28: Max Deformation option is selected (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
7.2.5.3 Azi and Aza
Aza affects the Filtered view, Aza can also be applied to the UnFiltered view by selecting ‘Apply Aza’
next to ‘View UnFiltered’ in the ‘Main’ window.


Azi is “incoming Azimuth” set in the previous application, e.g. SAACR_raw2data. The SAAXMark
and SAAYMark lines in the XY graph (the square graph) are not rotated by Azi.
Aza is “additional Azimuth” set in this window. The SAAXMark and SAAYMark lines, and the XY
plot of data in the XY graph ARE rotated by Aza. If Aza = 0 then SAAXmark faces up as seen in
Figure 7.29.
Figure 7.29: Changing the Aza (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
December 2014
189
When applying an offset to the Azimuth, keep in mind positive numbers rotate clockwise (when
looking down onto the SAA) while negative numbers rotate counterclockwise.





Total Azimuth which is the total rotation relative to original raw data is the sum of Azi and Aza.
Manual Aza is when the editable box near the square graph (XY Graph) is used and the ‘Apply’
button is clicked. The ‘Apply’ button updates data in the four graphs based on the new azimuth
value.
Automatic Aza - Drag the “--” lines in the X and Y views to a point of elevation, right click and
select ‘Auto-Aza’. The data are rotated to set the most recent Y value to zero at the manually or
automatically selected elevation. This has the effect of maximizing the deformation in the X view
(similar to rotating the SAA to point +X in the direction of deformation).
No Aza – To leave all data in the coordinate system of the SAA (as modified by any Azi) manually
set Aza = 0.
Save Aza – Aza are saved with the SAA Cartesian data, separate from “Filter” files.
Quick View Button
Figure 7.30: ‘QuickView’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Views the first and last frames of data as “absolute shapes” (blue & red lines in each graph) as well as
the difference between them (black lines…try zooming in).
7.2.6.1 File Menu
‘Save View’ is very similar to the ‘Capture’ button (see Figure 7.31), though ‘Save View’ opens a
window to save the “view_quick[arr1].png” file and the image includes the button and slider similar
to a screen shot.
7.2.6.2 Rotating Graphs
Using the left or right mouse button (holding it down), click either graph and move the mouse around
to rotate the view.
7.2.6.3 X Button
Clicking this button gives 2 D side-on views of XZ and YZ data.
190
December 2014
SAA Software
7.2.6.4 Z Button
Clicking this button gives a 2 D top-down view of XY data.
7.2.6.5 Default Button
When clicked this button returns the view of the two graphs to the default view.
7.2.6.6 Capture Button
This button when clicked is very similar to the ‘Print Screen’ feature. Open an image application like
‘Paint’ and paste the captured image. The Captured image is just of the two graphs and their legend.
See Figure 7.31 below.
Figure 7.31: Results of 'Capture' button in 'QuickView' (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
7.2.6.7 EI = 0 Radio Button
Disallows tilting of view, gives a 2D X, Y, Z view of the graphs.
7.2.6.8 Zoom Slider
The zoom slider allows the user to zoom into or out of the graphs. This feature is best utilized when
the ‘EI=0’ button is clicked allowing the user to clearly zoom in to see the difference (black line)
between the first and the last frame (blue and red lines).
December 2014
191
AlarmSet Button
Figure 7.32: The ‘Main Alarm Settings’ window (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
The Alarm Parameters function creates “Alarm” File for SAAs or non-SAA sensors. “Alarm” files are
for use during conversion of new data in SAACR_raw2data (Section 5), not for generating actual
alarms in SAAView, which does not use alarms. However, SAAView is used to EVALUATE alarms after
they are generated. Creation and evaluation of alarms are done in SAAView because it is easier to see
the context of any alarm selections on a larger data set.
Use the ‘Parameters’ button to create alarms that will be enacted when SAACR_raw2data (Section 5)
performs a conversion to raw SAA or non-SAA sensor data to engineering units. This window provides
a summary of Alarms and a means to turn them on or off (where “ON” means the alarm is ready to
be triggered by events when the SAACR_raw2data converter runs). This window also enables copying
one alarm’s set of parameters to other alarms.
7.2.7.1 File Menu
Delete “Alarm” File (see Section 7.2.1.5).
7.2.7.2 Settings Menu
About Time Settings: When a particular time is to be set, drag the vertical dashed line and right click
it to select that time.
7.2.7.3 Alarm Level Drop-Down List
There are 8 levels of alarms, each level can have different parameters and actions.
192
December 2014
SAA Software
7.2.7.4 Parameters Button
Figure 7.33: Green ‘SAA Params’ button for Vertical SAA (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Figure 7.34: Green ‘SAA Params’ button for Horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
December 2014
193
Figure 7.35: Yellow ‘Sensor Parameters’ button showing Pzs (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Figure 7.36: Yellow ‘Sensor Parameters’ button showing EPCs (Project: horiz_pz_epc).

194
Filtered Check-Box
o The Alarm function can act on Filtered (by the SAAView filter function) data, but it is
best to use it on UnFiltered data, as that is what will normally be available in
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5). Note that UnFiltered data ARE truncated by any filter
setting that excludes vertices from the data. By default, SAAView performs some
truncation in its filter function. This can be important if, for instance, part of the SAA
is on a reel or temperature artifacts near the surface distort the data. To change this
behaviour, change the filter settings in the “Main Preview” window: select ‘FilterSAA’.
December 2014
SAA Software
Note: The source of the spikes, or other problems, should be found and eliminated. Usually
errors are caused by hardware / software setup and the raw data. Make corrections before
proceeding to use alarms.







Magnitude Check-Box
o Selecting ‘magnitude’ guarantees that the selected variable will always increase in the
positive direction. If ‘magnitude’ is NOT selected, then some variables can be negative
at times. Note that even when ‘magnitude’ is NOT selected, and X and Y components
exist, deformation data are treated as sqrt(dx^2 + dy^2). Even so, this can lead to
negative values, for instance when the first frame is slightly larger than subsequent
frames.
Variable List
o Select the variable to use as a basis for the alarm:
 var – var(1) - subtracts the first frame of data from all the data, thereby
changing “shape” to “deformation” or “pressure” into “change in pressure”.
 Rate - is the time-rate-of-change of the variable
 Var - is the variable itself without any initial data subtracted.
Comparison (“Old”) Data List
o This is the data used as a basis of comparison for the alarm.
 Average of n - takes the mean of n preceding frames, where n is selected
below.
 Selected Time - uses a single frame as a selected time, selected by dragging
the vertical dashed line to a time, then right –clicking it to select.
 Current-1 - is the frame immediately preceding the most recent frame.
Current Data List
o The data that will be compared to the “Comparison”, or “old” data defined above.
 Non-avg Single - the most recent frame.
 Avg of n - the mean of the most recent n frames, where n is selected below
this list.
Limits List
o Trigger an alarm if the variable increases (Upper), decreases (Lower) or both relative
to its basis.
Units / Value List
o “Change” denotes a comparison of “Current” to “Old” according to previous settings.
“Limit” denotes a value that if met or surpassed by the variable, triggers an alarm.
“%” denotes a percent change. “Units” denotes a change by n units of the variable,
where n is set below this list.
 Apply Button - The ‘Apply’ button must be clicked for the field to be applied.
Action Settings Button
o Select ACTION settings (e.g. sound, email, sms), to be taken when an alarm is
triggered.
o A sound can be set to go off when an alarm is triggered.
o As well as an Email or text message (SMS) sent.
December 2014
195
Figure 7.37: ‘Actions Settings’ Window.

Vertex or Sensor # Slider
o The vertical slider is used to select any vertex of an SAA or any non-SAA sensor of a
type (e.g. “piezometer” or “strain gauges”).
7.2.7.5 On / Off Button
This button requires the target alarm to be highlighted before clicking the button.
7.2.7.6 All On / Off Button
Clicking this button turns all the alarms off or on.
7.2.7.7 ‘Copy 2 All’ Button
This button requires the target alarm to be highlighted before clicking the button.
7.2.7.8 Copy From Button
The ‘Copy From’ button requires two steps:



Select the recipient alarm.
Click the ‘Copy From’ button.
Select the SAA with the settings to be copied.
7.2.7.9 Save Button
The ‘Save’ button preserves the selected final states as well as any saved Parameters or copies of
parameters. Note that each setting of ‘Parameters’ has its own ‘Save’ button as does the ‘Actions’
setting within ‘Parameters’. The ‘Save’ steps result in “ArrayAlarmSAA.mat” and
“ArrayAlarmSensor.mat” being created in the project folder. These are what SAACR_raw2data uses
to enact alarms.
View Button
The ‘View’ button when clicked will give a detailed list of the Alarms.
196
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.38: A detailed list of alarms.
7.3 Unfiltered / Filtered Data View Windows
Note: Viewing Filtered data can be deceptive. It is important to understand the effects of
averaging and other filter parameters on the data. A comparison of Filtered and Unfiltered
view can help in diagnosing possible issues.
Figure 7.39: ‘Unfiltered’ data view of a Vertical SAA (Project: large_shear).
Note: Hovering the mouse over most of the controls will cause a definition of the control to
appear.
December 2014
197
Figure 7.40: ‘Filtered’ data view of a Vertical SAA with azimuth adjusted (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.41: ‘Unfiltered’ data view of a Horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
198
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.42: ‘Filtered’ data view for a Horizontal SAA (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
Notice in the Horizontal SAA the Filtered and Unfiltered views are missing the Y and XY Graphs. They
are not required for an SAA that is horizontal as there is no “looking down view” (XY Graph) nor is
there a Y position.


File Menu
Export Data (Moved) – To export data go to ‘Graphall (+Exports)’ (Section 7.3.3).
Save Image – A ‘Save File’ window will open starting in the project folder allowing the user to
give a name to the image and change the folder. Saves the image of the window in “.png”
format.
Settings Menu
The first five settings in this menu drop down list are described in Section 7.2.2.
Figure 7.43: ‘Filtered View’ window with labels for graphs.
December 2014
199
7.3.2.1 Edit Site Photo Size
Choosing this menu item opens a small window allowing the user to change the size of the Site Photo
on the window by percentage.


The Site Photo can be personalized by placing a “site_image[n].png”, “site_image[n].jpg” or
“site_image[n].bmp” file in the folder holding project data (where n is the sequential number
of the SAA at the project site). Only this file name with the bracketed numbering will work.
To disable the Site Photo set the width and height to zeroes in the ‘Edit Site Photo Size’ menu
option.
Figure 7.44: ‘Edit Size of Photo’ window.
7.3.2.2



Edit Message Box
Choosing this menu item allows the user to edit the text inside the Message Box.
The changes only stay while in editing mode to allow for screen shots.
Click the ‘Settings’ menu and uncheck the ‘Edit Message Box’ menu choice to return to the
default Message Box text.
7.3.2.3 Change SparseView Settings
See Section 7.2.2.5.
7.3.2.4 AutoCall
Choosing this menu item opens a window like the Figure 7.45 below. ‘Auto-Call’ allows the user to
name a group of settings and select the desired SAAs to be included for automatic image exporting.
This will export an image of the ‘View Screen’ for each group of settings for each SAA included.
The Steps to use This Menu Selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
200
Click the ‘ViewFiltered’ or ‘ViewUnFiltered’ button and make the desired settings.
Click the ‘Settings | AutoCall’ menu option.
Name the group of settings and select the SAAs to be included.
Repeat this process, there is space for up to 30 different groups of settings.
To add the following command-line to LoggerNet, see Section 4.2.4.
 Command-Line: saaview.exe auto_call [path the project folder] all_names
 Or for batch processing, use the same command-line in Section 4.2.4.
 Output Files: “view_auto_[unique setting name]_[sernum].png”
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.45: ‘Auto Call Setup’ window.
Command-line calls can be made to SAAView to export images of the ‘VIEW’ window (Filtered or
UnFiltered). Each image will use a named group of Settings for ‘Edit Site Photo Size’, ‘Edit Message
Box’, whether a filtered or unfiltered view was called from the ‘Preview’ window, and one of
cumulative displacement, incremental displacement, or cumulative deviation; Auto-Call is set up by
making VIEW settings, then saving a name to associate with those settings.
One or more names may be called from the command line. An option is available to export files for all
names manually: ‘Settings | AutoCall | File’, which can only be used after the command line has been
run and there are images available to export.
The Message Box appearing in the ‘VIEW’ window will by default contain settings information for each
image, specific to each SAA. This is helpful in interpreting what is being viewed.
Note: All settings are saved as overrides to automatic settings, by AutoCall. Leave most
settings (e.g. azimuth, filtering, project name, ..) constant between command line calls or
inconsistent images could result. To maintain consistency manual viewing should be done
with a separate ‘Project’ folder holding copied “multi_saa_allcart.mat” (and any other
non-SAA sensor) data.
7.3.2.5 View menu
This menu allows the user to decide the type of data to view, these settings do affect the export.







Deformation (CumDisplacement) dx, dy – Accumulative Displacement.
Absolute Shape (CumDeviation) x, y – Accumulative Displacement.
Magnitude sqrt(dx^2+dy^2) – Overall Displaced Vector.
Incremental Displacement d(diffx), d(diffy) – Incremental displacement.
Shear (IncDisplacement / Length, %) –Shows Displacement over Segment Length by Percentage.
Temperature – Measured at each temperature sensor.
Advanced – Consultation with Measurand is recommended.
o Rotation Diagnostic – Tests for whether or not there has been a rotation of the SAA.
o Accel Total – Test for total acceleration issues with SAA.
December 2014
201
GraphAll(+Exports)
Figure 7.46: ‘GraphAll’ graph for a Vertical SAA and 7 PZ3s (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Figure 7.47: ‘GraphAll’ graph for a Horizontal SAA, 12 PZz3s and 2 EPCs (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
‘GraphAll’ plots all available sensors (converted by SAACR_raw2data) including SAA, PZ, EPC, and SG
on common axes. Incoming SAA data carry the settings made in SAAView (e.g. units will be metric if
so selected). Non-SAA sensors have the units set during conversion.
7.3.3.1 File Menu
 Export Data
202
December 2014
SAA Software
o
o
By choosing this menu item a file will be created with the data of the current SAA and any
non-SAA data present with the current settings.
The following window (see Figure 7.48) will open warning the user to turn off ‘Relative’
(to first reading) or use current ‘Relative’ settings for the non-SAA sensors.
Note: Non-SAA data are exported only in VDV exports.
Figure 7.48: Warning message after clicking ‘Export data’.
o
o
o
Settings Button
o Takes the user to the ‘Export’ window, seen in Figure 7.49.
Turn Off Button
o Turns off any relative settings made and returns the settings to relative to first
reading.
By clicking either button (not Cancel) the ‘Export’ window will open (see Figure 7.49).
o Format Drop Down List
 Atlas_1 – ASCII in Atlas format (1D/file*num_saa in Atlas_SAAView
folder. 2 NAN columns are reserved for future).
 Atlas_3 – Same as Atlas_1 format but (1D/file*num_saa in
Atlas_SAAView folder. 2 NAN columns are reserved for future).
 VDVxyz – [Legacy Do Not Use] Vista Data Vision distorts this form of
export through double-integration.
 VDVallXallYallZ – [Select ‘View, Absolute Shape’ first] Vista Data Vision
(export includes non-SAA data) Similar to Atlas_3; 3D/file*num_saa in
VDV_SAAView folder. See header of file, and “Info” file for column
definitions. Data grouped as X1X2X3…Y1Y2Y3…X1X2X3…
 Matlab – Cell array of structs. Readable ONLY in Matlab.
Figure 7.49: ‘Export Data Settings’ window.
December 2014
203
Note: VDVallXallYallZ when ‘View Absolute Shape’ is selected first will NOT contain
absolute shape data. It will contain incremental deviation data, which is what VDV expects.
o

Format Definitions Buttons
 Clicking this button opens an information window.
o Export
 Clicking this button will open a ‘File Save’ window with a predefined name for the
file that can be changed by the user.
 The file will be similarly named: “SAAF_51256_20_def_filt_allXallYallZ.dat” in
folder (for this file) VDV_SAAView.
Save Image
o A ‘File Save’ window opens allowing the user to save a “.png” file in the project folder.
7.3.3.2 Settings Menu
Figure 7.50: ‘FilterSAA’ and ‘FilterSensors’ have been turned ON (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).


204
Filter SAA
o Selecting or un-selecting this option applies or un-applies filtering to the SAA. When
‘GraphAll’ is clicked in either ‘Filtered View’ or ‘UnFiltered View’ the default for this graph
is UnFiltered. Therefore if filtering is desired on the SAA, then it must be turned on.
Filter Sensor
o Selecting or un-selecting this option applies or un-applies filtering to the non-SAA sensors.
When ‘GraphAll’ is clicked in either ‘Filtered View’ or ‘UnFiltered View’ the default for this
graph is UnFiltered. Therefore if filtering is desired on the non-SAA sensors, then it must
be turned on.
December 2014
SAA Software
7.3.3.3 View Menu
Figure 7.51: ‘Logarithmic Time’ and ‘Highlights’ ON (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).


Highlighting On / Off
o Turning the highlighting feature on highlights points on the SAA and non-SAA sensors that
have been selected on the sliders.
Logarithmic Time On / Off
o Turns timescale to logarithmic
7.3.3.4 Dashed Lines
 Hold left-click and move either line to desired time, right-click and select ‘Time Subset’ to view
the subset of time.
 To restore graph to original time expanse, right-click and select ‘Restore All Times’.
Figure 7.52: Preparing for a ‘Time Subset’: turn Y and PZ off, set SAA to single and select the time frame (Project:
boston_uk_tides_pz).
December 2014
205
Figure 7.53: The view after turning ‘Time Subset’ on (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
While in ‘Time Subset’ the SAA number can be changed and other settings can be changed without
losing the subset. It would be useful to turn on all sensors that were on the same location instead of
all sensors on at once.
7.3.3.5 Type Radio Buttons
To add or remove sensors from graph, select or deselect radio buttons.
7.3.3.6 From Drop-Down Menu
Select the sensor number start with.
7.3.3.7 Skip Drop-Down Menu
Will skip every nth sensor.
7.3.3.8 To Drop-Down Menu
Select the sensor number to end with.
7.3.3.9 Single Radio Button
If selected, only the selected sensors will show.
206
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.54: A single SAA is showing (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
Figure 7.55: All SAAs are showing (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
7.3.3.10 Hilite Sliders
 For SAAs move slider to highlight an SAA.
 For non-SAAs:
o Move the slider to highlight a non-SAA sensor
o Right-Click Slider:
 PZ Relative Off – Default relative to first reading, select this to turn off.
 Cancel
7.3.3.11 Zoom Sliders
 Slide to vertically zoom in on sensors individually.
 As the Zoom slider moves the associated scale on the left of the graph changes relative to the
zoom.
December 2014
207
Figure 7.56: Notice the ‘Zoom’ in comparison to the scale (Project: boston_uk_tides_pz).
7.3.3.12 Total Display
Gives the total number of sensors available.
X Graph & Y Graph
Figure 7.57: X Graph and Y Graph (Project: large_shear).
208
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure 7.58: X graph only for horizontal SAAs (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
Holding the left-click the user can drag the “--” lines where desired. Right clicking the “--” lines gives
the following menu options:
7.3.4.1 Relative to 1st Vertex
Sets the relative vertex to the first vertex. This is the default.
7.3.4.2 Relative to Selected Vertex
Selecting this menu item a red “--” line appears at the bottom of the graphs, drag the red line to the
desired Z vertex for all the graphs to be relative to.
7.3.4.3 Place User Line
Places a line and label (U1, U2 … Un) wherever the “-- ” line is when the menu item is selected.

Right click the black user line to get this menu:
o Edit User Line Name
 Be careful using this feature, the name is between the two graphs and can be
difficult to read.
o Delete User Line
o Delete All User Lines
7.3.4.4 Delete All User Lines
Selecting this menu item will delete all user lines added.
December 2014
209
7.3.4.5 Select Vertex 1 / Vertex 2
 Selecting either of these menu items result in the window seen in Figure 7.59.
 Choose a vertex (0 starts at the reference end of the graph) to compare a second vertex to.
 All graphs will then reflect the two vertices for comparison.
Figure 7.59: ‘Vertex Selection’ window.
Figure 7.60: Vertex 1 = 30 and Vertex 2 = 40. Notice the two colors on the XY graph (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.61: Vertex 1 = 1 and Vertex 2 = 24 (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
210
December 2014
SAA Software
Variable T Graph
Holding the left-click the user can drag the “--” lines where desired. Right clicking the “--” lines gives
the following menu options:
7.3.5.1 Select Time Subset
After sliding the left and right “--” lines to create a desired time block, select this menu item to have
the time block reflected in the other graphs.
Figure 7.62: A time subset was selected in the Variable T graph and then reflected in all other graphs (Project:
large_shear).
Figure 7.63: A time subset was selected in the Variable T graph and then reflected in the other graph (Project:
horiz_pz_epc).
December 2014
211
7.3.5.2 Selected Times Only
After sliding the left and right “--” lines to two desired periods of times, select this menu item to have
the two periods of times only reflected in the other graphs.
Figure 7.64: Selected times in Variable T graph are displayed in all other graphs. Only two points can be selected at one
time (Project: large_shear).
Figure 7.65: Selected times in Variable T graph are displayed in the other graph. Only two points can be selected at one
time (Project: horiz_pz_epc).
7.3.5.3 Relative to 1st Selected Time
After sliding the left “--” line to the desired period of time, select this menu item to have all the graphs
ignore the time period before the selected time period. It sets a start point.
7.3.5.4 Restore All Times
Resets all graphs to the default view.
212
December 2014
SAA Software
A. SAACR Utilties
Data are acquired in a CS Data Logger from one or more SAAs. At some point files are obtained from
the CS Data Logger, holding frames of raw data. It could be hours, weeks, or months of data. Raw data
is meaningless without being calibrated into engineering units, using Measurand “Calibration” files
and 3D algorithms which is what SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) does.
There are times when data needs to be manipulated in a way that is not directly provided by
SAACR_raw2data. The following utilities provide a wide range of ways to manipulate data files by
joining, separating or matching.
A.1 SAACR_raw2raw_concat
Used to concatenate multiple “*.dat” raw data files, acquired from one or more SAAs or non-SAA
sensors attached to a Campbell Scientific Data Logger. This is done so the files can be viewed or
exported as one single file for conversion by SAACR_raw2data.
Note: An alternative to using SAACR_raw2raw_concat before conversion is to use
SAACR_cart2cart after conversion.
SAACR_raw2raw_concat can be used to consolidate various raw data files from the same CS Data
Logger, so long as the files are from the same CS Data Logger with the same setup of sensors attached.
The frames are concatenated column-wise from the data tables and arranged to be in time-sequence
with any duplicate times removed. To use raw data files from different CS Data Loggers it will be
necessary to manually edit one of the files to have the same header as the other file.
Note: SAACR_raw2raw_concat must be run as many times as there are types of sensors
attached to the CS Data Logger (one time per each SAA, piezometer, earth pressure cell, or
strain gauge). Sensor types cannot be mixed.
A.1.1 Preceding / Alternate Steps
SAACR_raw2raw_concat is used after two or more files of raw data have been acquired from a CS
Data Logger and have not been concatenated by Campbell Scientific LoggerNet software. This can
happen if files were collected by different people, different methods, etc. This application can be more
convenient than editing the files manually to create one file.
A.1.2 The process
In this example, “SAA1” files from ‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\example_t1_2epc’ and
‘C:\Measurand Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\example_t2_2epc’ will be concatenated. The process is
identical for “SAA2” files and for EPC and PZ3 data files.
December 2014
213
Figure A- 1: The files used in this example.
Figure A- 2: A view of the raw data in the first file used in this example.
214
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure A- 3: A view of the raw data in the second file used in this example.
4.
1. Start SAACR_raw2raw_concat (Figure A- 4).
2. Click the first ‘Browse’ button on the top left of the window.
3. Open the first file.
Repeat for the next file under the first.
Note: Hovering the mouse over most of the controls will cause a definition of the control to
appear.
5. When all files are selected click the ‘Concatenate’ button.
December 2014
215
Figure A- 4: SAACR_raw2raw_concat ‘Initial’ window.
Two SAA1 raw data files have been chosen. If SAA2 is present its files must be handled in a subsequent
concatenation. Any number of files may be selected (up to the number of available lines).
Concatenated files can be further concatenated any number of times which is done for larger number
of files.
Ensure that files are of the same type and that the setup has not changed. In this case the “setup” is
represented by “2pec” in the filenames.
Once the process has started the files are put together into a single file, in time-sequence, with any
duplicate frames made single. Record numbers are preserved but not used by any subsequent
Measurand utilities or applications.
Figure A- 5: An example output file.
216
December 2014
SAA Software
A “Time vs. Frame number” graph will appear once the concatenation is complete. The time
relationship is shown before and after sorting by the program. In this case the two files were selected
in order of increasing time, so no sorting occurred. It can be seen that the time-base was not regular
for very early data. This happens frequently during “startup” of a site, when the CS Data Logger is
turned on and off a few times.
Figure A- 6: A view of the ‘Time vs. Frame number’ graph if the same example files had been selected in opposite order.
As seen in Figure A- 7, the first graph is very different from the second unlike in Figure A- 6. This is
what happens when the two files are selected in opposite order.
Figure A- 7: A view of the ‘Time vs. Frame number’ graph for this example.
Now the files are concatenated and depending on the context, the next step should be:
December 2014
217



Concatenation of other data types present (in this example there are PZ, EPC and SG sensors
present). Each type must be concatenated in turn. All concatenated types should be kept
together in the same folder for subsequent conversion.
Conversion of the concatenated raw data using SAACR_raw2data (Section 5).
If other raw data are available from the same CS Data Logger with the same setup, the
concatenated raw data might be further concatenated with other raw data.
A.2 SAACR_cart2cart
Used to concatenate, in time, multiple files of converted SAA Cartesian (x, y, z) data so they can be
viewed or exported as one single file. The “Cartesian” files will have been converted from raw data
files by SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) and must be of type “multi_saa_allcart.mat”. To concatenate
non-SAA files use SAACR_cart2cart_matchup (Appendix A.3).
Note: SAACR_cart2cart only operates on SAA data (files of type “multi_saa_allcart.mat”)
and not on non-SAA files such as PZ, EPC and SG files.
A.2.1 Preceding / Alternate Steps
Before SAACR_cart2cart can be used, two or more SAA raw data files from a Campbell Scientific Data
Logger would have been acquired and converted to Cartesian data by SAACR_raw2data. This utility is
used to put two or more “multi_saa_allcart.mat” cartesian files together into one single file, sorted
to be in time-sequence with any duplicate times removed.
An alternate path to the same end would use SAACR_raw2raw_concat (Appendix A.1) to concatenate
the raw data files to make a single raw data file and then convert it with SAACR_raw2data (Section 5).
A.2.2
218
The Process
1. Start SAACR_cart2cart (Figure A- 8).
2. Click the first ‘Browse’ button on the top left of the window.
3. Open the first file.
4. Repeat for the next file under the first.
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure A- 8: SAACR_cart2cart ‘Initial’ window.
Choose the “multi_saa_allcart.mat” files that need to be concatenated. Any number of files may be
selected (up to the number of available lines). Concatenated files can be further concatenated any
number of times which is done for larger number of files. Also, the files do not need to be in order as
the utility will sort the times.
5. When all files are selected click the ’Concatenate’ button.
6. Place the resulting file in a folder.
7. It is OK, and recommended, to rename the file distinctively.
Figure A- 9: The resulting file to be saved.
At the end of the concatenating process a prompt to name a “*.txt” file containing an ASCII version of
the concatenated “*.mat” file will appear. The file will have the default format used during
conversions with SAACR_raw2data.
Use SAAView to view the newly concatenated file. Use “Open Cr Logger File” and select the
concatenated file.
December 2014
219
Note: SAACR_cart2cart can concatenate files that have already been concatenated once.
The “multi_saa_concat.mat” file will have to be renamed to “multi_saa_allcart.mat” so
the application will treat it properly.
A.3 SAACR_cart2cart_matchup
Used to concatenate multiple unmatched files of converted SAA or non-SAA Cartesian (x, y, z,
pressure, etc.) data, so they can be viewed or exported as one single file per sensor type. The Cartesian
files will have been converted from raw data files by SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) and must be of type
“multi_saa_allcart.mat” or the various non-SAA types such as “PZ3_data.mat”, “EPC3_data.mat”, etc.
This utility is used to concatenate in time two files that have been converted from raw data files by
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5). This utility must be used when the data are “unmatched”: something
has changed about the setup such as a rearrangement of sensors, added sensors, decommissioned
sensors, etc. This process may be repeated using already concatenated files with the objective being
to get one single set of files to view and export. This utility may also be used on matched data but is
limited to concatenating only two files at a time.
Note: SAACR_cart2cart_matchup operates on (only two sets of) matched or unmatched
SAA and non-SAA data and requires use of a “matchup.txt” file.
SAACR_cart2cart (Appendix A.2) operates only on matched SAA data but does not require the extra
file and can concatenate more than two files at a time.
A.3.1 Preceding / Alternate Steps
Before the utility is used two or more SAA raw data files from a Campbell Scientific Data Logger would
have been acquired and converted to Cartesian data by SAACR_raw2data (Section 5). The utility is
used to put two or more “multi_saa_allcart.mat” Cartesian files together into one single file, sorted
to be in time-sequence with any duplicate time removed. At the same time it combines all “non-SAA
sensor” files, one per sensor type.
The utility operates on unmatched files. “Unmatched” means that they come from the same CS Data
Logger but after a change such as adding additional sensors or changing the order of sensors.
In this example four raw data files that include two different setups will be concatenated / converted
/ concatenated.
The four project folders are shown in Figure A- 10. The “*2epc” and “*3epc” entries indicate that two
of the folders contain earth pressure cell (EPC) data from two sensors and two folders contain data
from 3 EPC sensors. The “T1…T4” entries indicate that data are from four different time spans.
220
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure A- 10: The four folders used in this example.
The four folders in Figure A- 10 (and some more concatenated ones) are installed in ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAA3D\logger_files\’ when SAACR_raw2data is installed and may be used to practice the steps
shown throughout the manual. There are also some example “site.txt” and “matchup.txt” files
installed in the same place.
Figure A- 11: The five files that are in each project folder.
A.3.2 The Process
To put all four folders into one single folder containing single Cartesian files, one per sensor types:
1. Use SAACR_raw2raw_concat (Appendix A.1) to concatenate the “t1” and “t2” raw data into
single “t12” raw data files, and “t3” and “t4” into another single raw data file “t34”.
December 2014
221
Figure A- 12: The before and after folders for this example.
The concatenated raw data have been placed in two new folders with “t12” and “t34” in the folder
names. All the filenames end in “_concat”, except for the “project_info.dat” file which is copied in,
unchanged from one of the original folders. However, if the SAA setup has changed, be sure that the
correct “project_info” file (there will be two different ones) stays with the SAA setup it describes.
Figure A- 13: The files in “*t12*” and “*t34*” folders.
2. Use SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) to convert “t12” and “t34” raw data files into “t12cart” and
“t34cart” data files, using different “Site” file for each (for information in “Site” files, see
SAACR_raw2data Section 5.8). The “Site” file directs the conversion of non-SAA sensors (finds
“Calibration” files, selects units, etc.).
222
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure A- 14: The “t12” and “t34”“Site” files.
In this example of “Site” files, the setups vary only in the presence of a third EPC in the “t34” set.
Therefore, the “Site” files vary only in the inclusion of calibration data for epc3_03 in the “t34” “Site”
file and a declaration of “num: 3” instead of “num: 2”. Also, there must be an additional
“non_saa_coeffs” file for the third EPC present. It can be found in ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\non_saa_coeffs’ and “Site” files can be found in ‘C:\Measurand
Inc\SAARecorder\calibrations\site’.
SAACR_raw2data is used twice in this example, once for each folder of raw files (t12raw and t34raw)
to produce t12cart and t34cart folders containing all converted data. The files for “t12” are shown in
Figure A- 15, note that the “Site” file is specific to a two-EPC setup where it should be a three-EPC for
“t34”. During the conversion be sure to select the appropriate “vertical / horizontal” and “reference
end” settings for the SAAs.
December 2014
223
Figure A- 15: The SAACR_raw2data start window with “t12” raw files and a “Site” file for two-EPCs.
Figure A- 16: The SAACR_raw2data ‘Start’ window with “t34” raw files and a “Site” file for three-EPCs.
After the conversion by SAACR_raw2data, the “t12” and “t34” folder contents will look like Figure A17. The “multi_saa_allcart.mat” files hold data from both SAAs. The “EPC3_data.mat” and
“PZ3_data.mat” files hold data from all the EPCs and PZs respectively.
The individual setup-specific “Site” files have guided the utility through converting the 2-EPC and 3EPC setups. Our example files “t12” and “t34” are now ready to be concatenated into a unified set
“t1234”.
Figure A- 17: The “t12” and “t34” files after conversion.
3. Form and place a “matchup.txt” file in the most recent folder (“t34cart”).
Place a “matchup.txt” file in the most recent Cartesian folder to be concatenated using
SAACR_cart2cart_matchup. In this example it will be the “t34cart” folder. The “Matchup” file must
224
December 2014
SAA Software
contain the rules for creating a final data set that has an equal number of columns (one column per
sensor). For concatenation to work “sensor1” must have as many columns as “sensor2”.
In this example (see Figure A- 18), NaN is used to represent the “missing” EPC sensor in earlier
“sensors1” (“t12”) data, to produce a total of three columns: 1, 2, Nan. “sensors2” has three full
columns (1:3). An annotated “Matchup” file example is included in the installed examples.
Optionally, “Matchup” entries may be included for other sensors. Entries have been made for the pz3
sensors present, but are not necessary because their setup has been changed.
Figure A- 18: Excerpt from “matchup.txt” placed in “t34” Cartesian folder, all lines starting with “//” are comments.
4. Use SAACR_cart2cart_matchup to form single “t1234cart” files in the correct time-sequence,
and allowing for unmatched data.
Start SAACR_cart2cart_matchup and browse for the two Cartesian data folders “t12cart” and
“t34cart”. Any file in the folder can be selected and the folders can be selected in any order. The utility
will rearrange their order from oldest to most recent during concatenation. Once the files have been
selected click on the ‘Concatenate’ button.
Figure A- 19: Two files selected representing the two folders “t12cart” and “t34cart”.
December 2014
225
5. If the setup remains the same after the concatenation, and the now-matched data are placed
in an “archive” folder, SAACR_raw2data may be used to keep building the now-matched data
set.
When concatenation is complete the utility will create an “archive” subfolder within the most-recent
cart folder (“t34cart” in this example) and request to save the concatenated set in the “archive” folder,
sensor type by sensor type (see Figure A- 20).
Figure A- 20: The three files created by the utility for this example.
The data in the “archive” folder will always be concatenated into the full data set whenever a
conversion is done, so the “archive” folder and contents must always be present in any subsequent
conversions.
As new raw data are placed in “t34cart”, and SAACR_raw2data is called, SAACR_raw2data will convert
any raw data that have not previously been converted and will concatenate all Cartesian data in
“t34cart” along with the “t34\archive” data to make a new converted Cartesian set.
Optionally, after SAACR_cart2cart_matchup is used, the “archive” folder that is holding the final
concatenated file could be moved to a new folder (“t1234”) and used as the new project folder once
renamed.
A.4 SAACR_cart2manycart
Used to break a single “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file holding data from multiple SAAs into separate files
each holding data from one of the SAAs. It operates on converted Cartesian data produced by
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5).
A.4.1 Preceding / Alternate Steps
This utility is used after files of raw data have been acquired from a CS Data Logger and converted to
Cartesian data (by SAACR_raw2data) when the files are not directly compatible and therefore cannot
be concatenated. Incompatibility can result from a change in the CS Data Logger setup such as adding
an SAA or changing an SAA. Individual SAA files produced by SAACR_cart2manycart can be
concatenated on an individual basis.
226
December 2014
SAA Software
A.4.2
The Process
1. Start the utility and select a file of type “multi_saa_allcart.mat” containing data from
multiple SAAs.
Note: This utility will NOT work on non-SAA sensors (“EPC3_data.mat” and
“PZ3_data.mat” in this example).
2. An ‘Open File’ window will display where the file to be separated is selected.
Figure A- 21: The ‘Startup’ ‘Open File’ window.
3. A notice will appear (see Figure A- 22) describing the next step.
4. The next step requests the naming / saving of a “Base” filename for auto numbering with
serial numbers.
Figure A- 22: The pop-up window explaining the next step.
December 2014
227
Note: Existing files with the same “Base” name will be over-written without warning!
5. Select ‘Yes’ to continue, a base name will appear bearing the serial number of the first SAA.
 The name can be modified if desired, but it is highly desirable to include the serial
number.
Figure A- 23: The default filename for the base file with the serial number of the first SAA.
Figure A- 24: The ‘Process Complete’ window stating the process is complete.
The utility will produce as many files as there are SAAs. In this example there were two SAAs with
serial numbers 50013 and 50021.
228
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure A- 25: The resulting files from the utility.
December 2014
229
B. SAACR_DataChecker
The SAACR_DataChecker application is used to view and filter raw SAA data that has been recorded
with a Campbell Scientific Data Logger. It provides color-coded graphs of the SAA data vs. time, which
allows the user to verify the dataset, and see where any data anomalies might have occurred during
recording. Filtering functions are also available to select which samples to keep or remove from the
current dataset.
B.1 Opening Raw Data Files
Click on the ‘Open Data File(s)’ button and select the CS Data Logger files to view. The CS Data Logger
files should have a “*.dat” filename extension, and should have a name similar to
“CR1000_SAA1_DATA.dat”, “CR1000_SAA2_DATA.dat”, etc. Several “*.dat” files can be open
simultaneously, although all of the files open should have been recorded from the same CS Data
Logger at the same time; i.e. all of the files should correspond to SAAs that are part of the same
installation.
Figure B- 1: The ‘Initial’ SAACR_DataChecker window. Click on the ‘Open Data Files’ button to select one or more CS
Data Logger files to view.
Once the “*.dat” files are opened, ensure that one or more of the ‘View X-axis Data’, ‘View Y-axis
Data’, or ‘View Z-axis Data’ checkboxes are checked, depending on which sensor data is to be viewed.
A colored representation of the CS Data Logger data, similar to that shown in Figure B- 2, should be
visible.
The ‘Differential’ checkbox can be found at the top of the screen between the ‘Help’ button and the
‘View X-axis Data’ checkbox. When the ‘Differential’ checkbox is checked, the graph colors are used
to indicate the change in sensor output relative to the first sensor output included in the time range
of samples. When the user clicks on the ‘Differential’ checkbox to check it, a popup window prompts
them to confirm a “Maximum Range of Differential Data to Plot”. The default value is 100 counts. The
colors assigned to the data points in differential mode are based on this maximum value, i.e. any
change in output of a sensor beyond +/- (maximum value) results in the color of that data point being
black. Any differential change within +/- (maximum value) applies a color based on the graph color
key shown to the right of the graph.
230
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure B- 2: Screen capture of SAACR_DataChecker after two data logger “*.dat” files have been opened.
Depending on the number of samples and the available screen width, the CS Data Logger samples
might be separated by dotted vertical lines. Colors are assigned to each CS Data Logger sample
according to the legend at the far right of the window.
If the SAA has a total number of segments which is not equal to a multiple of 8, then the bottom of
the color graph shown in Figure B- 2 could have some black horizontal stripes (see for example Figure
B- 3). This is because an SAA contains one microprocessor for each grouping of 8 segments, so if the
SAA has a number of segments which is not a multiple of 8, then the internal microprocessor at the
far end of the SAA will have some “unconnected” segments. These “unconnected” segments typically
output sensor count values that are less than 10000 counts, hence the black stripes at the bottom of
the graph.
Figure B- 3: Screen capture of a vertical SAA with 88 segments.
By looking at the colored graph, the user can quickly tell if there were sudden changes in sensor
outputs recorded by the CS Data Logger, or if there are portions of the SAA that are aligned differently
relative to one another.
December 2014
231
For example, in Figure B- 2, the SAA was still on its reel for the duration of the CS Data Logger
recording, so the sensor segments were all aligned in different directions, as was evidenced by the
number of different bands of color.
In Figure B- 3, the recording was performed with the SAA aligned vertically in a hole, so the X and Y
sensor outputs were near zero G (approximately 31000 to 33000 counts) and the Z sensor outputs
were all near negative one G (approximately 18000 to 20000 counts).
In Figure B- 4, there are a couple of time periods in which the SAA was unresponsive, so that the
sensor output values in the “*.dat” file were set to zero. This caused vertical black bands to appear in
the color graph for that file.
Figure B- 4: Graph of data containing some periods of time in which samples were missed (indicated by vertical black
bands). If a CS Data Logger cannot communicate with an SAA for some reason, the sample output data in the CS Data
Logger’s “*.dat” output file contains values of zero for each SAA sensor.
Note: If a CS Data Logger cannot communicate with an SAA for some reason, the sample
output data in the CS Data Logger’s “*.dat” output file contains values of zero for each SAA
sensor.
B.2 Viewing Individual Raw Data Samples
Using the SAACR_DataChecker application, it is possible to view the actual sample text for the
individual SAA data samples that were recorded by the CS Data Logger. This can be done at any time,
by left-clicking the mouse on the color graph (see Figure B- 5). The position of the mouse cursor
determines which sample gets displayed on the window. In order to “zoom-in” on a region of interest
in the color graph uncheck the ‘View Entire File’ checkbox, and then select ‘Start’ and ‘End’ times to
control which parts of the dataset are visible in the color graph.
232
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure B- 5: The text of a raw data sample can be viewed, simply by left-clicking the mouse on the region of interest on
the color graph
B.3 Filtering Data Files
To remove some of the data from the dataset that was opened in SAACR_DataChecker:
1. Click on the ‘Filter’ button in the ‘Main Viewing’ window.

The window shown in Figure B-6 will then appear.
2. To apply the same filtering settings to all SAA data files that are currently opened, check the
‘Apply filtering changes to all SAA / files’ checkbox at the top of the ‘Filter Data’ window.
3. Click the ‘Remove Bad / Invalid Data’ button to remove any data samples that contain raw
accelerometer outputs that are less than 10000 counts or greater than 60000 counts.
No accelerometer in an SAA should output values outside the range of 10000 counts to 60000 counts
under normal operation. If this does happen, it is usually an indication that the SAA could not be
reached for a given sample (i.e. a communications problem) or an indication that some damage had
occurred to the SAA.
4. Click the ‘Choose Selected Data’ button to manually select which samples to include or
exclude from the dataset.
Figure B- 6: ‘Filter Data’ window providing choices for how to filter raw sample data from the CS Data Logger files.
December 2014
233
B.4 Saving Data Files
When filtering one or more data files, the data files can be saved using the ‘Save Data File(s)’ button
on the ‘Main Graphing’ window. Backup files (with file extensions of “*.bak”, “*.bak2”, “*.bak3”, etc.)
will be generated each time the ‘Save Data File(s)’ button is clicked.
234
December 2014
SAA Software
C. Using Network Data Concentrators
Note: All new SAA systems are intended for use with a PC containing one or more RS-485
serial ports. This section is included for older SAA systems that used separate data
concentrators for each SAA that were connected to the PC with an Ethernet interface.
C.1 Configuring Network Addresses
Figure C- 1: Window for modifying the properties of a network connection.
When using the SAA software to collect SAA data over a network connection, it is necessary to ensure
that the PC is using a valid network IP address. The network Data Concentrators that are shipped with
Measurand's SAA systems have default IP addresses of the form 10.0.0.251, 10.0.0.250, 10.0.0.249,
etc. If these defaults are left unchanged, then it is necessary to make sure that the PC has a network
IP address of the form 10.0.0.x, where x>=1 and x<240.
IP addresses can be modified for the PC by going to:
1. 'Control Panel' and clicking on the 'Network Connections' icon.
December 2014
235
2. Select the appropriate network connection from the choices provided (this will vary
depending on PC system configuration) and right-click on it to bring up a pop-up menu.
3. From the pop-up menu, select the 'Properties' item.
 This brings up a window similar to that shown in Figure C- 1.
4. Select 'Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)' and then click the 'Properties' button.
 This will bring up a window similar to that shown in Figure C- 2.
5. Enter in an address of the form 10.0.0.x where x>=1 and x<240, in the 'IP address' field.
 Use 255.255.255.0 in the 'Subnet mask' field.
 The other fields for gateway and DNS servers can be left blank.
6. Click the 'OK' button in the ‘Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties’ window.
7. Click the 'OK' button in the ‘Local Area Connection Properties’ window.
Note: It may be necessary to modify the TCP/IP properties for the PC's network connection
to the SAA data concentrators, so that the PC has a static IP address of the form 10.0.0.x
where x>=1 and x<240.
Figure C- 2: Enter in an IP address of the form 10.0.0.x where x>=1 and x<240.
236
December 2014
SAA Software
Note: The subnet mask should be 255.255.255.0. The other fields can be left blank.
C.2 Connecting Hardware
The data concentrators are used to collect the SAA data and relay it over Ethernet connections to a
PC running SAARecorder application. Each data concentrator is housed in a plastic enclosure, with
ports for power, network connection, and connection to an SAA.
Each SAA is connected to a data concentrator by means of a 10-pin cable. This cable should only be
connected or disconnected when the data concentrator is NOT powered up, i.e. when its power
supply is unplugged from the wall. The Ethernet cable from each SAA should be connected to the
network hub or switch provided with the installation. An Ethernet cable should also be connected
from the PC to the same network hub or switch.
C.2.1 Recommended Hardware Connection Procedure
The recommended startup procedure for connecting the SAA hardware is as follows:
1. Connect the data cable from each SAA to the 10-pin port of a data concentrator.
 It does not matter which SAA is connected to which data concentrator - the SAA and
data concentrators are automatically detected by SAARecorder application.
2. Connect the Ethernet cables from each data concentrator to the multi-port network hub /
switch.
3. Connect an Ethernet cable from the PC to the same multi-port network hub / switch.
4. Apply power to the hub / switch using the wall-mount adapter provided.
 If just a single SAA is being used with a data concentrator, follow the same
instructions, except the hub is not necessary.
5. An Ethernet crossover cable can extend directly from the data concentrator to the PC.
 Measurand also sells single SAAs with four to eight segments and attached RS-232 to
RS-485 converters that terminate in a DB9 serial connector and can be connected
directly to PC serial ports.
 These SAAs do not require a data concentrator.
6. If a serial-to-USB adapter is to be used, please contact Measurand (Appendix K) for
recommended devices.
7. Some serial-to-USB adapters will not operate at high speed, or will not work with all hardware.
Steps 8 to 11 apply for SAAs connected to data concentrators only:
8. Apply power to each of the data concentrators by plugging in their corresponding wall-mount
adapters.
9. Wait approximately 30 seconds for each of the data concentrators to boot up and establish
network connections.
10. Perform network testing (optional - see Appendix C.3.1 below).
December 2014
237
11. Start SAARecorder application to collect data.
Note: When powering down a data concentrator, it is necessary to wait a minimum of 20
seconds before re-applying power.
C.2.2 Recommended Hardware Shutdown Procedure
The recommended shutdown procedure for disconnecting the SAA hardware is as follows:
1. Close SAARecorder application (if it is running).
2. Unplug the wall-mount adapters for each of the data concentrators (if used) or unplug the
power cable from the SAA's power injection input (if used).
3. Unplug Ethernet cables from the multi-port network hub / switch (if used).
4. Unplug each SAA data cable from the 10-pin data concentrator ports (if used), or unplug each
SAA's DB9 connector from its corresponding PC serial port.
C.3 Testing Hardware Connections
The following instructions for testing apply for SAAs connected to data concentrators only.
C.3.1 Network Testing
In order to verify that the network is configured properly for acquiring SAA data, it is often useful to
do a simple "ping" test to verify that data can be sent and retrieved from all addresses on the network.
For example, to find out if there is a valid network connection to the data concentrator with IP address
10.0.0.251, click the ‘Start | Run’ option on the PC and type "ping 10.0.0.251" in the ‘Run’ dialog
window.
If the network is configured properly, something similar to that shown in Figure C- 3 should be seen.
Figure C- 3: Example of a successful ping test.
238
December 2014
SAA Software
If an Ethernet cable is unplugged or damaged, or if the IP address of the data concentrator was
incorrect, a window similar to that shown in Figure C- 4 would be displayed instead. If the PC is not
configured to have an IP address of the correct form (i.e. 10.0.0.x where x>=1 and x<240) then a
window similar to that shown in Figure C- 5 should be seen.
Note: This error could also occur if the data concentrator IP address was invalid, or if one
or more Ethernet cables were damaged or not connected.
Figure C- 4: Example of a failed ping test - in this case the data concentrator was not powered up, and could not be
reached.
Figure C- 5: Another example of a failed ping test - in this case the PC did not have a network IP address of the form
10.0.0.x, where x>=1 and x<240.
December 2014
239
D. Maximum Achievable Clock and Data Rates
The following tables indicate the data rates attainable with two, four, and six 24 foot long research
SAARs operating at the same time on an HP Pavilion PC (A1710n) with a dual-core processor (AMD
Athlon 64 X2, 4200+, 2.20 GHz,), 896 MB RAM, and a GeForce 6150 LE, 512 MB graphics card. For data
rates attainable with other PC and / or SAA configurations, please contact Measurand (Appendix K).
D.1 Two SAAs in 3-D Mode
Baud Rate (Kbps)
Hardware Triggered (Hz)
Addressing Mode (Hz)
38.4 (default)
45
40
57.6
78
52
115.2
135
75
230.4
160
94
Baud Rate (Kbps)
Hardware Triggered (Hz)
Addressing Mode (Hz)
38.4 (default)
45
49
57.6
78
67
115.2
135
110
230.4
200
155
Baud Rate (Kbps)
Hardware Triggered (Hz)
Addressing Mode (Hz)
38.4 (default)
45
33
57.6
75
42
115.2
90
54
230.4
90
64
D.2 Two SAAs in 2-D Mode
D.3 Four SAAs in 3-D Mode
240
December 2014
SAA Software
D.4 Four SAAs in 2-D Mode
Baud Rate (Kbps)
Hardware Triggered (Hz)
Addressing Mode (Hz)
38.4 (default)
45
47
57.6
78
64
115.2
135
100
230.4
200
135
Baud Rate (Kbps)
Hardware Triggered (Hz)
Addressing Mode (Hz)
38.4 (default)
40
28.5
57.6
60
33
115.2
60
42
230.4
60
47
Baud Rate (Kbps)
Hardware Triggered (Hz)
Addressing Mode (Hz)
38.4 (default)
45
43
57.6
75
58
115.2
130
87
230.4
200
113
D.5 Six SAAs in 3-D Mode
D.6 Six SAAs in 2-D Mode
December 2014
241
E. Using a PC and SAARecorder for Data Logging
Measuring Displacements using Periodic Connections to an SAA using SAARecorder
When it is not necessary to have continuous measurements from SAA, periodic measurements can be
made to determine relative displacements from one epoch to the next. Typically this approach
involves:
a. Collecting data at a starting epoch giving a reference shape for the SAA (to which all
subsequent SAA shapes will be compared), and
b. Collecting data at subsequent epochs to see the progressive movement of the SAA.
This procedure is illustrated in Figure E- 1 where the reference shape for an SAA is taken at time T0
and subsequent measurements are taken at times T1, T2 and T3.
Figure E- 1: Determining Relative Shape of an SAA using Periodic Measurements.
When taking periodic measurements, it is recommended to record raw data from an SAA at each
epoch and then calculate the reference shape or displacements. Raw data can always be manipulated
to allow for different processing settings in post processing (E.g., Averaging, SAA Reference, and
Modelling Mode).
If reference shapes or displacements are exported as coordinate data, the raw data cannot be
recovered if an error was made in the processing settings.
242
December 2014
SAA Software
E.1 Choosing an Averaging Setting
Increasing the sample size from which SAA solutions are determined reduces the amount of noise in
the solutions. Figure E- 2 illustrates the % change in noise in SAA solutions relative to a 1000 sample
benchmark.
Figure E- 2: Effect of sampling size on noise.
E.2 Setting up a File and Folder System for Storing Raw Data
Before collecting raw data and creating reference shapes, it is important to have established a naming
convention and folder system to organize the data that will be collected over the course of the
measurement campaign. File names should be informative and include such information as
measurement date, file type, operator initials and other pertinent information.
E.3 Recording Raw Data
Raw data can be recorded by selecting the ‘File| Save raw data file’ option as illustrated in Figure E3.
Figure E- 3: Saving a raw data file.
The length of the session is shown on the Recording form as illustrated in Figure E- 4.
December 2014
243
Figure E- 4: Recording raw data.
Once the recording is stopped, a ‘Choose Raw Data Filename’ window opens allowing the user to
name and place the new “.rsa” file. This window also offers the user to take a ‘Save Text Snapshot
File’ while saving the data by clicking the checkbox provided, see Figure E- 5.
Figure E- 5: ‘Choose Raw Data Filename’ window.
244
December 2014
SAA Software
F. Connecting using the SAAR Interface Box
Measurand's SAAR Interface Box (Figure F-1) is used for large installations of multiple SAAs.
Figure F- 1: SAAR Interface Box.
The connection box in Figure F- 1 contains 10-pin ports for up to 4 high speed research SAAs. The
white serial cables go to two eight port RS-485 cards in the PC. The DB-9 connector on the box uses
the following pins:
Pin 3 = Record Data.
Pin 4 = Clock Input.
Pin 5 = Ground.
Measurand's SAAR Interface Box uses multiple white serial cables that go to two eight port RS-485
cards that are housed within the PC. Figure F- 2 shows a picture of one of these cards shown outside
of the PC. The clock and trigger inputs are TTL-level inputs that can be used to either clock data
samples or trigger the collection of a raw data file respectively.
More information on using the clock and trigger inputs can be found in 'SAA Setup | Advanced |
Hardware Triggering' in Section 6.4.15. The "Power" LED glows when the +12 VDC supply is connected
and working properly. The "Record" LED glows whenever the trigger input line goes high.
The 10-pin SAA cable(s) should only be connected or disconnected when the SAAR Interface Box is
NOT powered up, i.e. when its +12V power supply is unplugged from the wall.
Pin 3 of the DB-9 connector on the SAAR Interface Box is the 'Record Data' input, records raw data on
the PC when SAARecorder is configured for triggered recording (see ‘SAA Setup | Advanced |
Hardware Triggering’ in Section 6.4.15).. When SAARecorder is configured for triggered raw data
collection (see Section 6.2 ‘Saving and Exporting Raw Data (File)’) data is saved to a raw data file
automatically whenever this line is high and SAARecorder is running.
Pin 4 of the same DB-9 connector is the 'Clock Input' line. The rising edge of this line is used to trigger
a data sample for all connected SAAs. Measurand recommends a 50% duty cycle for this line or a 5
December 2014
245
ms minimum pulse width, with a typical frequency of about 32 Hz at 38400 bps. The maximum
frequency possible for this line is approximately 45 Hz at 38400 bps. Higher data collection rates are
possible depending on the baud rate settings used in the application (see Appendix D for details). If
SAAR data samples are being triggered with a clock input, SAARecorder must be properly configured
for clocked data (see Section 6.4.15, 'SAA Setup | Advanced | Hardware Triggering' for details).
Pin 5 of the DB-9 connector is the common or ground line.
Figure F- 2: View of the SAAR Interface Box, RS-485 card (shown outside of the PC), SAA cable, and +12 VDC power
supply.
The RS-485 card used is the 7804 PCI card from SeaLevel Systems Inc (www.sealevel.com). It can be
purchased pre-configured through Measurand or from Sealevel directly. If purchased directly from
Sealevel, it is necessary to ensure that the card is configured properly for RS-485 mode and that the
switches for the pull up and pull down resistors are active.
It is also necessary to configure the Oscillator frequency for all 8 ports of each RS-485 card. Please
refer to the 7804.pdf document included in SAARecorder installation folder for details.
If 8 or fewer RS-485 ports are required, then only one RS-485 card is needed. For this case, the SAAR
Interface Box should be wired as shown in Figure F- 3.
246
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure F- 3: SAAR Interface Box cable setup for use with just a single (8-port) RS-485 card.
The recommended start up procedure for connecting SAARs with the SAAR Interface Box is as follows:
1. Connect the data cable from each SAAR to one of the four 10-pin ports of the SAAR Interface
Box.
 It does not matter which SAAR is connected to which port - the SAARs are
automatically detected by SAARecorder application.
2. Apply power to the SAAR Interface Box by plugging in its corresponding +12 VDC power
supply.
3. (**optional) Turn on the clock input (if used) to the SAAR Interface Box.
4. Start SAARecorder application to collect data.
5. The box shown in Figure 6.2 will pop-up. Click 'Connect SAA' and the following window, see
Figure F- 4 below, will appear.
6. Click the 'SAAR Interface Box' choice under 'Connection to SAA'.
 Click 'Next' or the ‘Search’ tab. The ‘Search’ tab can be used to automatically detect
SAAs on individual COM ports.
 If it is necessary to manually add certain devices (older SAAs or piezometers for
example) then the ‘Devices’ tab should be used to enter in the serial numbers of those
devices.
 The ‘Test’ tab can be used to perform basic connectivity and voltage / current checks
of the SAA.
 By clicking the grey and green button, 'Start with Found SAAs ' that may appear beside
the 'Serial Port(s):' box, the application will launch the data collection portion of
SAARecorder (GO TO Section 6.1.8) for the detected SAA(s). The ‘Start with Found
SAAs’ might not be visible for older SAAs.
December 2014
247
Figure F- 4: SAARecorder ‘Connection’ window with the SAAR Interface Box selected.
7. IF there are issues connecting to the SAA(s) GO TO Appendix J or Appendix K
(Troubleshooting FAQs & Support (Help)).
8. Otherwise GO TO Section 6.1.6 (Connection Completion).
The recommended shutdown procedure for disconnecting SAARs with the SAAR Interface Box is as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
248
Close SAARecorder application (if it is running).
Clear the record data and clock inputs (if used) to the SAAR Interface Box.
Unplug the +12 VDC power supply from the SAAR Interface Box.
Unplug each SAAR data cable from the 10-pin SAAR Interface Box ports.
December 2014
SAA Software
G. Integrating Other Sensors Into the Main CS Logger Program (Advanced)
** Please contact Measurand if assistance in this procedure is needed. The example given below is
not exactly how the code looks today, but it is similar. **
When adding additional sensor programming to the ‘Main SAA Program’, conflicts can arise with
existing programming. The SAA_Include references COM Ports 1-4. If any of these ports are used for
connecting other sensors, then all references to these ports must be commented out of the serial port
subroutines in the “SAA_Include” file. Provided is an example program for a logger that reads data
from vibrating wire piezometers, vibrating wire earth pressure cells, and SAAs.
Note: The SAA-related code in the following example is not the most recent code. This
example is meant to give an idea as to how to add other sensors into the ‘Main Program’.
Please consult Measurand for assistance when trying to combine measurements from
various sensors into a single program.
The SAA data is collected over Scan Interval 1 (1 hour) with an AIA averaging level of 1000. The
piezometer and earth pressure data is collected at the same interval.
'----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -'Campbell Scientific CR1000 Datalogger Program for collecting ShapeAccelArray (SAA) Data
'Program Author: Jason Bond, Measurand Inc. (built upon single array program by Murray Simpson) (c) 2008
'Version History:
'1.0: Initial internal release
'1.1: 'AVERAGING' added to the PROJECT_INFO file
'1.2: 'PROGRAM_VERSION_NUM' added to the PROJECT_INFO file
'Program now contains 2 components to prevent editing of critical code by users: i)
SAA_Communicator_Vx_x and ii) SAA_Include_Vx_x
'1.3 'Pre-sample added to clear sensor values on first read.
'ScreenObs subroutine added to filter sensor values.
'Code added to accomodate partial octets at the end of an SAA
'1.4 'Ability to assign SAAs to any COM port added (instead of requiring sequential use)
'Ability to use RS232 port to hook up additional SAAs added
'1.5 'SAA now shutdown and repowered after a CRC, COM or range error
'Check for 0 values added to ScreenObs subroutine
'Dim u,v As Long variables had to be moved outside of ScreenObs subroutine to compile. Problem arose
after updating OS on CR1000.
'1.6 21 Aug 2009:
December 2014
249
'ScreenObs subroutine removed. Now looked after in SAA3D
'Range Errors removed from SERIAL_ERRORS_FILE
'Code to accomdodate partial octets removed. Now looked after in SAA3D.
'1.7 'Various changes made in an attempt to improve computation speed. VERSION NOT RELEASED and
changes not implemented
'in subsequent versions due to anticipation of new high resolution SAAs. Historical significance only.
'a)SetSAAPort added to allow switching of SAA baud
'b)CRC check removed
'c) Temperature averaging removed - just one value read in SAA data. GetSAASample modified to allow
this.
'1.8 A) Addition of alarm notification through email/text:
'a) input of number of masked segments (from the top)
'b) input of tilt alarm in degrees
'c) input of email notification parameters
'd) addition of storage variable for previous readings
'B) Addition of high resolution SAA data collection capabilities
'a) public HIGH_RES_SAA As boolean added
'b) close, open and flush serial port commands added to shut down sequence when data has failed to be
acquired.
'Note: When changing the version number, the Include file reference below must be updated and the
VERSION_NUM constant in the include file must be modified
'1.9 Jan. 27, 2010:
'uses updated include file: CPU:SAA_Include_V1_9.CR1, corrects bug in collection of high res. data from
SAA longer than 8 segments.
'Note: When changing the version number, the Include file reference below must be updated and the
VERSION_NUM constant in the include file must be modified
'2.3 Uses new include file: CPU:SAA_Include_V2_3.CR1
'2.4 Capable of acquiring voltage, current, and top segment temperature from SAATop devices integrated
into the top of SAA. Uses new include file: CPU:SAA_Include_V2_4.CR1
'2.5 Nov. 12, 2010: Added acquisition of logger voltage and temperature for diagnostic purposes
'2.6 Nov. 29, 2010: Added code for using SAA232_5 device for combining up to 5 SAAs on a single serial port
'2.61 Dec. 7, 2010: Fixed bug in 2.6 for 2nd array data data table
'2.62 Dec. 13, 2010: Modified to sample some preliminary samples as fast as possible upon powerup before
switching to regular scan interval for samples
250
December 2014
SAA Software
'2.63 Mar. 10, 2011: Modified to include array serial numbers in SAA diagnostic files.
'2.64 Aug. 10, 2011: Modified to use new include file: CPU:SAA_Include_V2_63.CR1
'2.65 Aug. 11, 2011: Modified to use new include file: CPU:SAA_Include_V2_64.CR1
'2.66 Aug. 25, 2011: Modified to provide an error table for each array connected to the datalogger.
'2.67 Sept. 27, 2011: Modified to use new include file: CPU::SAA_Include_V2_66.CR1
'2.68 Oct. 7, 2011: Modifieed to use new include file: CPU::SAA_Include_V2_67.CR1, got rid of unused
tilt_alarm stuff
'3.00 Oct. 20, 2011: Simplified, cleaned up code, uses new include file: CPU::SAA_Include_V3_00.CR1.
'3.01 Dec. 5, 2011: Modified to use new include file: CPU::SAA_Include_V3_01.CR1
'3.02 Dec. 12, 2011: Modified to use new include file: CPU::SAA_Include_V3_02.CR1
'3.03 Mar. 05, 2012: Modified to use new include file: CPU::SAA_Include_V3_03.CR1
'DECLARE USER SPECIFIED CONSTANTS (must be modified by user to match application specifications):
'--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> START <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
'Enter the number of preliminary samples to capture
Const NUM_PRELIM_SAMPLES = 5
' Enter the number of SAAs to be monitored:
Const NUM_SAAS = 2
' Enter the number of PZ strings to be monitored (has to be at least 1 even if there are no PZ strings !!!)
Const NUMBER_PIEZO_STRINGS = 0
' Enter the number of total devices (number of SAAs + PZ strings):
Const NUM_DEVICES = 2
' Enter the number of Earth Pressure Cells (EPC) to be monitored:
Const NUM_EPCS = 3
' Enter the number of piezometer (PZ) to be monitored:
Const NUM_PZ3S = 12
'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> START <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
' Enter the number of raw data samples to average for each measurement:
December 2014
251
' Samples can range from 100-25500 if HIGH_RES_SAA = true; samples are collected at 400 Hz, thus ~64
seconds are required for NUM_TO_AVG = 25500 (NOTE: HIGH_RES_SAA must be false for older SAAs, sernum
< 47100)
' If HIGH_RES_SAA=false, then samples are collected more slowly, and NUM_TO_AVG should be set to
between 1 and 100 (typically only used for older SAAs (sernum < 47100).
Const NUM_TO_AVG = 1000
' Enter the maximum number of octets (8 segment units) of any single SAA being used (must be at least 1,
even if no SAA octets are present):
Const MAX_NUM_OCTETS = 15
' Enter the maximum number of piezometers per string, must be at least 1, even if no piezometers are used
Const MAX_NUM_PIEZOS = 1
' Enter number of octets for each SAA (each SAA must have an entry):
Const SAA1_NUM_OCTETS = 15
Const SAA2_NUM_OCTETS = 15
' Enter number of piezometers for each Measurand piezometer string (if piezometers are used)
' Const PIEZO1_NUM_PIEZOS = 0
' Enter COM port number for each SAA (each SAA must have an entry) COM1=1, COM2=2, COM3=3, COM4=4
Const SAA1_COM_PORT = 1
Const SAA2_COM_PORT = 2
' Enter COM port number for each Measurand piezometer string (if piezometers are used)
' Const PIEZO1_COM_PORT = 1
' Enter SAA232-5 port number for each SAA (each SAA must have an entry) 1-5 if SAA232-5 port is being used,
otherwise enter 0
Const SAA1_232_5_PORT = 0
Const SAA2_232_5_PORT = 0
' Enter SAA232-5 port number for each Measurand piezometer string (if piezometers are used)
'Const PIEZO1_232_5_PORT = 0
' Input whether or not SAATop is present (0 = not present, 1 = SAATop is present) --> typically present in SAAs
built in 2011 or later
Const SAA1_SAATOP = 1
Const SAA2_SAATOP = 1
'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
'--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------'END DECLARE USER SPECIFIED CONSTANTS (must be modified by user to match application specifications):
Include "CPU:SAA_Include_V3_03.CR1"
252
December 2014
SAA Software
'DECLARE PUBLIC VARIABLES (can be modified by user to match application specifications):
'----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> START <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
'Earth Pressure Cell Public Variables
Public EPC(NUM_EPCS,6)
'Piezometer Public Variables
Public PZ3(NUM_PZ3S,6)
Public Result
Public Power_Save_Flag As Boolean
'add Public ACC, TEMP, and diagnostic variables for each SAA:
'SAA1:
Public SAA1_ACC_VALUES(MAX_NUM_OCTETS,NUM_SENSORS_PER_OCTET) As Float
Public SAA1_TEMP_VALUES(MAX_NUM_OCTETS) As Float
Public SAA1_SAATOP_VOLTAGE As Float
Public SAA1_SAATOP_CURRENT As Float
Public SAA1_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE As Float
'SAA2:
Public SAA2_ACC_VALUES(MAX_NUM_OCTETS,NUM_SENSORS_PER_OCTET) As Float
Public SAA2_TEMP_VALUES(MAX_NUM_OCTETS) As Float
Public SAA2_SAATOP_VOLTAGE As Float
Public SAA2_SAATOP_CURRENT As Float
Public SAA2_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE As Float
'preliminary loop count
Public PRELIM_COUNT As Float
'Data Tables
'Project Descriptor Info
DataTable(PROJECT_INFO,FIRST_SCAN,-1)
December 2014
253
Sample(1,PROGRAM_VERSION_NUM,Float)
Sample(1,AVERAGING,Long)
Sample(1,PROJECT_NAME,String)
Sample(1,NUMBER_SAAS,Long)
Sample(NUM_SAAS,NUM_OCTETS_INDEX(),Long)
Sample(NUM_SAAS*MAX_NUM_OCTETS,SERIAL_NUMS(),Long)
EndTable
'Serial Port Errors:
DataTable(SERIAL_ERRORS,True,-1)
Sample(1,SERIAL_NUMS(1,1),Long)
Sample(1,SERIAL_NUMS(2,1),Long)
Sample(NUM_DEVICES,NUM_CRC_ERRORS,Long)
Sample(NUM_DEVICES,NUM_COM_ERRORS,Long)
EndTable
'Logger Diagnostics:
DataTable(LOGGER_DIAGNOSTICS,True,-1)
Sample(1,LOGGER_VOLTAGE,Float)
Sample(1,LOGGER_TEMPERATURE,Float)
EndTable
'SAA Data Table Values (each SAA requires a data table):
'SAA1:
DataTable(SAA1_DATA,True,-1)
Sample(1,SERIAL_NUMS(1,1),Long)
Sample(SAA1_NUM_OCTETS*NUM_SENSORS_PER_OCTET,SAA1_ACC_VALUES(),Float)
Sample(SAA1_NUM_OCTETS,SAA1_TEMP_VALUES(),Float)
EndTable
'SAA2:
DataTable(SAA2_DATA,True,-1)
Sample(1,SERIAL_NUMS(2,1),Long)
Sample(SAA2_NUM_OCTETS*NUM_SENSORS_PER_OCTET,SAA2_ACC_VALUES(),Float)
Sample(SAA2_NUM_OCTETS,SAA2_TEMP_VALUES(),Float)
254
December 2014
SAA Software
EndTable
DataTable (SAA_DIAGNOSTICS,True,-1)
Sample(1,SERIAL_NUMS(1,1),Long)
Sample(1,SERIAL_NUMS(2,1),Long)
Sample(1,SAA1_SAATOP_VOLTAGE,Float)
Sample(1,SAA1_SAATOP_CURRENT,Float)
Sample(1,SAA1_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE,Float)
Sample(1,SAA2_SAATOP_VOLTAGE,Float)
Sample(1,SAA2_SAATOP_CURRENT,Float)
Sample(1,SAA2_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE,Float)
EndTable
' PZ3 Data Table
DataTable(PZ3_DATA, True, -1)
Sample(NUM_PZ3S*6, PZ3(), IEEE4)
EndTable
' EPC Data Table
DataTable(EPC_DATA, True, -1)
Sample(NUM_EPCS*6, EPC(), IEEE4)
EndTable
'SUBROUTINES
'------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------'***************************************************************************************
**********************************
'Sub: GetArrayData
'Purpose: gets all of the array data
'Inputs: None
'***************************************************************************************
**********************************
Sub GetArrayData()
December 2014
255
Scan(1,sec,0,1)'need this dummy scan to auto-allocate data tables
'fill in project info table:
CallTable PROJECT_INFO
Call GetLoggerDiagnostics()
CallTable LOGGER_DIAGNOSTICS
'add calls to each SAA and store data in respective tables:
'--------------------------------------------------------'SAA1:
If HIGH_RES_SAA
Call GetHighResSAAData(SAA1_ACC_VALUES,SAA1_TEMP_VALUES,1)
Else
Call GetSAAData(SAA1_ACC_VALUES,SAA1_TEMP_VALUES,1)
EndIf
CallTable SAA1_DATA
If SAA1_SAATOP>0
Call
GetSAATopData(SAA1_SAATOP_VOLTAGE,SAA1_SAATOP_CURRENT,SAA1_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE,1)
EndIf
TurnOffSAA232_5(1)
'SAA2:
If HIGH_RES_SAA
Call GetHighResSAAData(SAA2_ACC_VALUES,SAA2_TEMP_VALUES,2)
Else
Call GetSAAData(SAA2_ACC_VALUES,SAA2_TEMP_VALUES,2)
EndIf
CallTable SAA2_DATA
If SAA2_SAATOP>0
Call
GetSAATopData(SAA2_SAATOP_VOLTAGE,SAA2_SAATOP_CURRENT,SAA2_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE,2)
EndIf
TurnOffSAA232_5(2)
CallTable SAA_DIAGNOSTICS
'record serial errors table:
CallTable SERIAL_ERRORS
256
December 2014
SAA Software
'turn off outputting of project descriptor info after first run:
FIRST_SCAN = false
NextScan
EndSub
Sub GetVWData()
Scan(1,sec,0,1)'need this dummy scan to auto-allocate data tables
'Get Piezometer Data
SerialOpen (COM4,38400,4,0,0)
AVW200 (Result(),COM4,0,200,PZ3(1,1),1,1,NUM_PZ3S,1400,3500,1,_60Hz,1,0)
CallTable PZ3_DATA
AVW200 (Result(),COM4,0,200,EPC(1,1),1,13,NUM_EPCS,1400,3500,1,_60Hz,1,0)
CallTable EPC_DATA
SerialClose(COM4)
NextScan
EndSub
'DEFINE MAIN PROGRAM:
'-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BeginProg
'setup project descriptors:
'--------------------------'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> START <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
' Enter the Project Title
PROJECT_NAME = "Integration Example"
'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
December 2014
257
NUMBER_SAAS = NUM_SAAS
AVERAGING = NUM_TO_AVG
PROGRAM_VERSION_NUM = VERSION_NUM
HIGH_RES_SAA = true
'declare the serial numbers (each octet) for each SAA:
'--------------------------------------'SAA1 - S/N: 50013 nodes 50013 50019 50070 50083 50206 50225 50315 50347 50402 50413 50416
50438 50451 50515 51358
SERIAL_NUMS(1,1) = 50013
SERIAL_NUMS(1,2) = 50019
SERIAL_NUMS(1,3) = 50070
SERIAL_NUMS(1,4) = 50083
SERIAL_NUMS(1,5) = 50206
SERIAL_NUMS(1,6) = 50225
SERIAL_NUMS(1,7) = 50315
SERIAL_NUMS(1,8) = 50347
SERIAL_NUMS(1,9) = 50402
SERIAL_NUMS(1,10) = 50413
SERIAL_NUMS(1,11) = 50416
SERIAL_NUMS(1,12) = 50438
SERIAL_NUMS(1,13) = 50451
SERIAL_NUMS(1,14) = 50515
SERIAL_NUMS(1,15) = 51358
'SAA2 - S/N: 50021 nodes 50021 50226 50246 50440 50550 50557 50563 50565 50570 50968 50969
50982 50996 50998 50039
SERIAL_NUMS(2,1) = 50021
SERIAL_NUMS(2,2) = 50226
SERIAL_NUMS(2,3) = 50246
SERIAL_NUMS(2,4) = 50440
SERIAL_NUMS(2,5) = 50550
SERIAL_NUMS(2,6) = 50557
SERIAL_NUMS(2,7) = 50563
SERIAL_NUMS(2,8) = 50565
SERIAL_NUMS(2,9) = 50570
258
December 2014
SAA Software
SERIAL_NUMS(2,10) = 50968
SERIAL_NUMS(2,11) = 50969
SERIAL_NUMS(2,12) = 50982
SERIAL_NUMS(2,13) = 50996
SERIAL_NUMS(2,14) = 50998
SERIAL_NUMS(2,15) = 50039
'declare the number of octets for each SAA:
'------------------------------------------
'SAA 1:
NUM_OCTETS_INDEX(1) = SAA1_NUM_OCTETS
'SAA 2:
NUM_OCTETS_INDEX(2) = SAA2_NUM_OCTETS
'declare the com port assignment for each SAA:
'---------------------------------------------
'SAA1:
COM_PORT(1) = SAA1_COM_PORT
SAA232_5_PORT_INDEX(1) = SAA1_232_5_PORT
'SAA2:
COM_PORT(2) = SAA2_COM_PORT
SAA232_5_PORT_INDEX(2) = SAA2_232_5_PORT
'initialize COM and CRC errors:
NUM_COM_ERRORS = 0
NUM_CRC_ERRORS = 0
'initialize SAATOP parameters
SAA1_SAATOP_VOLTAGE=0.0
SAA1_SAATOP_CURRENT=0.0
SAA1_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE=0.0
December 2014
259
SAA2_SAATOP_VOLTAGE=0.0
SAA2_SAATOP_CURRENT=0.0
SAA2_SAATOP_TEMPERATURE=0.0
'declare the SAATop channel of each SAA:
'-----------------------------------'SAA1:
SAATOP_CHANNEL_INDEX(1) = 0
'SAA2:
SAATOP_CHANNEL_INDEX(2) = 0
'initialize power saving flag
Power_Save_Flag = True
'make sure modem starts off being on
SW12(1)
FIRST_SCAN = true
'do preliminary scans first
For PRELIM_COUNT=1 To NUM_PRELIM_SAMPLES
Call GetVWData()
Call GetArrayData()
Delay(0,10,2)
Next PRELIM_COUNT
'now do actual scan indefinitely
'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> START <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
Scan (1,hr,0,0)
'>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
'power switching
If Power_Save_Flag = True Then
If TimeIntoInterval(0,24,Hr) Then
260
December 2014
SAA Software
SW12(0)
EndIf
If TimeIntoInterval(6,24,Hr) Then
SW12(1)
EndIf
Else
SW12(1)
EndIf
' get VW sensor data
Call GetVWData()
' get SAA data
Call GetArrayData()
NextScan
EndProg
December 2014
261
H. Legacy Formats (SAACR_raw2data)
H.1 Legacy Format Definitions:












xyzt_1: ASCII and “multi_saa_allcart.mat” files that contain absolute position, and
timestamps only.
pos_accel_curv_t: ASCII and “multi_saa_allcart.mat” files that contain absolute position,
timestamps, acceleration, and curvature.
all/cur/mat: “multi_saa_allcart.mat” and “multi_saa_curcat.mat” MATLAB files only
server_mat:
“multi_saa_allcart.mat”,
“multi_saa_curcat.mat”,
“chunked”
“multi_saa_allcart.mat” MATLAB files (No acceleration data in chunked data) and any *.txt
non-SAA sensor files.
Atlas_1: Same as xyzt_1 but includes ASCII in Atlas format (1D/file *num_saa in Atlas_Export
folder).
TempC: Celcius temperature only.
Atlas_3: Same as xyzt_1 but includes ASCII in Atlas format (3D/file *num_saa in Atlas_Export
folder).
Atlas_1_cur: Same as Atlas_1 but CURRENT data only.
Atlas_3_cur: Same as Atlas_3 but CURRENT data only.
VDVxyz: Vista Data Vision, similar to Atlas_3 but without “NaN” columns and with headers.
See header of file for column definitions.
VDVallXallYallZ: Vista Data Vision, similar to VDVxyz but all X, all Y, and all Z grouped together.
X and Y are tilts, which will be cumsummed by VDV along the SAA. See header of file for
column definitions.
VDVallXallYallZ_EnglishUnits: same as VDVallXallYallZ but in inches and feet.
H.2 Reviewing the Files [Section 5.6]


multi_saa_allcart.txt
o A legacy format that should be avoided unless preserving an older format.
o ASCII concatenated Cartesian data (only if arriving data start with frame 0).
multi_saa_curcart.txt
o A legacy format that should be avoided unless preserving an older format.
o ASCII current Cartesian data.
o Contains formatted ASCII data; it is always the current data arriving from the CS Data
Logger. It is always formed.
Figure G- 1 is a typical legacy Cartesian data file. “Curcart” or “allcart” forms look the same; “allcart”
will have multiple sets of data where “curcart” files will have only one set of data per SAA. Each SAA
has an SAA header.
Cartesian data formats can vary, depending on selection.
262
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure G- 1: A typical “multi_saa_allcart data” file.
H.2.1 Atlas (Legacy)
There are now two legacy Atlas/Argus exports: Atlas_1 and Atlas_3. For new work, DIY should be used
as it can be tailored to Atlas requirements.
Legacy “Atlas_1” breaks up the “ASCII” files into individual files, one per dimension and SAA. All the
files appear in an “Atlas” folder, which is auto-created if not there already.
Another legacy Atlas export format called “Atlas_3” breaks up the “ASCII” files so that each SAA is
represented by a single file containing X, Y and Z data. All the files appear in an “Atlas” folder, which
is auto-created if not created already.
December 2014
263
Figure G- 2: Shows the resulting files of an export of type “Atlas_1” for nine SAAs. An “Atlas_3” export would create
one-third as many files.
H.2.2 Vista Data Vision (Legacy)
Legacy “Vista Data Vision” (VDV) files are very similar to “Atlas_3” files. “VDV” files are placed in a
‘VDV’ folder within the project folder, one file per SAA; each file contains X, Y and Z data. Each file has
a two-line header the vertices are called “Sensor_X_001”, “Sensor_Y_002”, etc. Unlike “Atlas” files,
there are no blank columns containing “NaN” or “blank”.
Figure G- 3: Show the resulting files of an export to type “VDV” for five SAAs.
264
December 2014
SAA Software
H.2.3 Tempc (Legacy)
Another legacy format is “Tempc”. It delivers temperatures in a simplified format; one per octet.
Temperatures are in degrees Celsius.
Figure G- 4: “Tempc.txt” file.
December 2014
265
I. Finding Azimuth
In the past it was recommended that the SAA be aligned in the direction of expected movement by
lifting and rotating the SAA so that the X-mark was pointing in the same direction as the expected
direction of movement. For very long SAAs it was difficult to know whether or not the SAA was lifted
from the bottom prior to turning the SAA to align the X-mark. This could lead to a twist being induced
on the SAA.
In order to remove this issue, it is now recommended that the SAA azimuth offset be measured and
input in to the SAA software during data processing. This way the SAA data is displayed so that the X
direction corresponds to the expected direction of movement or other desired heading. To determine
the azimuth offset, use the instructions given below.
I.1
SAA X-mark Protractor
1. Place the square protractor (Figure I. 1) around the PEX at the top of the SAA.
2. Rotate until the arrows are pointed in the expected direction of movement or other desired
heading of the SAA or other job site datum.
Figure I. 1: X-mark Protractor square protractor.
3. Place the clear disk marker (Figure I. 2) with the “X-Line” around the PEX on top of the
square protractor.
4. Rotate the clear disk around the SAA until the “X-Line” on the disk and the “X-Line” on the
PEX line up.
266
December 2014
SAA Software
Figure I. 2: X-mark Protractor clear disc marker.
5. Make note of the angle at the “X-Line”.
 This will be used in the software when doing azimuth correction.
 See Section 3.2.6.4.
 See Section 6.4.5.
 See Section 7.2.5.3.
Note: If the protractor needs to be placed over the PVC casing rather than the PEX, the
required hole size is marked so it can be cut to fit.
I.2
SAA Reference Segment Alignment
This method of determining alignment is only used in cases where the SAA is not completely placed
inside the borehole. An example of this is when a SAAScan is used to measure borehole alignment. It
is not used in standard SAA installations.
I.2.1 X-marking Visible
If the reference SAA segment at the top of a hole has a visible X-marking on it, determining the
reference azimuth in SAARecorder amounts to figuring out the direction where the X-mark is pointing,
relative to some known reference direction (ex: 30 degrees east of north).
The direction that the X-mark is pointing can be entered directly into SAARecorder using the ‘SAA
setup | Site properties’ menu item. Enter the direction relative to north as the “azimuth” angle in
degrees. Then the positional data in SAARecorder will be calculated such that +X displacements occur
in the north direction and +Y displacements occur in the west direction.
December 2014
267
I.2.2 X-marking Not Visible
The X-mark may not be visible if the top reference segment is inclined at an angle relative to vertical,
or if the top reference segment corresponds to a segment of the SAA that does not actually have a
visible X-mark. If the SAA comes out of the hole and onto a reel, there should be one or more
horizontal (or near horizontal) segments that can be used for alignment purposes as described below:
Figure I. 3: Side view of SAA going into hole.
Figure I. 4: Top view of SAA going into hole.
In a situation like that pictured above, the “real world” angle of the SAA going into the hole needs to
be found (the angle “A” in the top view picture above) and also take into consideration how the SAA
is rolled.
An accurate estimation of the SAA roll angle can be made for the first non-vertical segment coming
out of the pipe by taking the arctangent (should actually use the atan2 function for -180 to +180
degree output)1 of the Y-axis and X-axis accelerations of that segment. For example, in the scenario
drawn above, the azimuth angle of the SAA relative to north would be:
Azimuth = 180° + A - atan2(ref_accY,ref_accX) * 180°/PI
The accelerations of each segment of the SAA can be viewed easily in SAARecorder through the ‘Data
and graphs | Numeric data’ menu item.
atan2 function: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atan2
268
December 2014
SAA Software
J. Troubleshooting FAQs
J.1
Adding / Removing SAAs to a Data Logger:
I am planning to add (remove) an SAA to an existing Data Logger. Are there changes I need to
consider before converting the data?
1. Move all converted data files, exports and project preference files to a separate backup
directory.
 The ‘Main Project’ folder should only contain raw data files.
2. Open SAASuite and run SAACR_raw2data.
3. Make sure to select ‘Reset’.
4. Click ‘New Project’ and select the raw data files.
5. Select conversion preferences (model, reference, export options, etc.).
6. Complete conversion.
J.2
Adding an SAA to a Data Logger with Other Sensors:
I have some vibrating wire piezometers (or other sensors) that I read already with a Campbell
Scientific logger and I want to read SAA(s) with this same logger. How do I do that?
You will need to have at least one free serial COM port available on the logger for every 5 SAAs that
you want to read with an SAA232-5 and for every single SAA that you want to read with an SAA232.
The easiest way to add code for reading SAA(s) is to use the SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.1)
in SAASuite to generate a CR logger program that just reads SAA data. Then merge this program
together with your existing CR logger program for reading other sensors (Appendix G).
If you requires assistance doing this, please contact Measurand (Appendix K) and attach the two
programs that you would like to merge with a brief description of what your logger application is
supposed to do.
J.3
How to Collect & Convert Data Logger Data Automatically:
I want to collect my Data Logger data automatically and convert it. How do I do that?
See Section 4 for details on how to do this using LoggerNet and Section 3.1 for details on how to do
this in SAACR_FileGenerator.
J.4
Setting Alarms:
I want to have an alarm get triggered and sent to me if my data that is automatically converted
using SAACR_raw2data exceeds certain limits. How do I do this?
You will need to setup an alarm(s) using SAAView (Section 7.2.7). Then when SAACR_raw2data gets
called to convert new data, it will automatically check for any defined alarm condition and issue the
appropriate alarm if necessary.
December 2014
269
J.5
SAACR_raw2data disappears:
SAACR_raw2data just disappears when trying to convert my data without offering any feedback
that I can see. What should I do?
Please let us know what version of SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) you were using and send us all of the
raw data files that you were trying to convert. It’s possible that there could be a problem with one or
more of the raw data files, user-created site “Calibration” files, or even a bug in the software. We are
normally able to figure out what might be wrong and fix it quickly.
J.6
Combining Data Files From Different Data Loggers:
I have two sets of .DAT file data recorded from two different loggers and I want to combine them
together but SAARC_raw2raw_concat gives me this error popup: “File Error: Header is not
identical”.
In order to combine raw data from two different loggers, it is necessary to edit the header sections of
the data file(s) for one logger to match the header information from the first logger. Then
SAACR_raw2raw_concat (Appendix A.1) can be used to concatenate the files as per normal.
J.7
Issues Installing SAASuite and SAACR Applications:
I can’t seem to install the SAASuite application properly, and can’t get any of the SAACR Applications
installed. What am I doing wrong?
Chances are you don’t have full write privileges on your PC. Please contact your system administrator
for more information on how to install additional applications on your PC.
J.8
Finding X & Y Directions with Magnetometers and No Azimuth Correction:
I have one or more magnetometers in my SAA(s). I did not apply any azimuth corrections to my data
in SAACR_raw2data or SAAView. So what “real-world” directions are the X and Y data in?
If you have one or more magnetometers, and did not apply any additional azimuth corrections in
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5.7) or SAAView (Section 7.2.5) (i.e. azimuth = 0) then the X-axis data is in
the direction of magnetic north and the Y-axis data is in the direction of magnetic west.
J.9
Site File Issue:
I don’t think I created my site calibration file properly, because SAACR_raw2data just closes and
does not convert anything.
Please send us the “site calibration” file that you created, along with any raw data files that you might
have, and any other pertinent installation details. We should be able to create a site “Calibration” file
for you that will work with your data.
J.10 Quick Data Logger Verification:
How can I quickly verify that my logger installation is working correctly and collecting valid data?
270
December 2014
SAA Software
The SAA logger programs generated by SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.1) are configured by
default to collect 5 samples as quickly as possible, immediately after powering up. Thereafter, the
program is configured to collect data at the regular defined sampling interval. So by cycling power to
your logger you should be able to get those 5 samples in 5 minutes or less, assuming everything is
hooked up properly and is functioning OK.
A PC running LoggerNet (Section 4) can be used with a direct cable connection to the logger to
download the data and check that there are no communication errors (look at the
“SERIAL_ERRORS.dat” files Section 5.3.3) and that the data in the “SAAX_DATA.dat” file(s) (Section
5.3.2) is within normal limits.
Open the file(s) using SAACR_DataChecker (Appendix B) or try converting the data using
SAACR_raw2data (Section 5) and viewing the resultant “multi_saa_allcart.mat” file in SAAView
(Section 7).
J.11 Updated Data Logger OS to Version 26:
I recently upgraded my logger operating system to version 26 and now I am unable to receive any
SAA data.
There is a known issue with Campbell’s operating system (OS) version 26 and older SAA data collection
programs. If you use SAASuite to download and install the most recent version of
SAACR_FileGenerator Utility (Section 3) and create a new logger program, you should not have any
further issues collecting SAA data in OS 26.
J.12 Update Data Logger, Not Getting Data:
We updated our logger installations recently, but now we are unable to get any data.
A common error in many logger installations is that the ‘SAA_Include’ file is set to run on power-up,
instead of the actual ‘Main SAA Program’ file.
In LoggerNet (Section 4):
1. Click on ‘Connect’
2. Click the ‘File Control’ button
3. Determine which file is actually running and is set to run on power-up.
Another common problem (for loggers accessible through a modem) is that the modem used for
communications is powered on all of the time and might have crashed, causing the logger to be
unresponsive to outside communication requests. The recommended practice is the cycle power to
the modem once per day in order to allow it to be periodically reset.
SAACR_FileGenerator Tab (Section 3.1) does not configure the generated program for use with a
modem. The user needs to do this on their own using a text editor. If you require assistance with this,
please contact Measurand (Appendix K).
December 2014
271
J.13 COM Port Conflict:
I merged an SAA program file generated by SAACR_FileGenerator Tab with another program file
that I have collected data from other sensors, but the result will not compile because of a COM port
conflict.
In some rare cases, it is necessary to edit the “Include” file generated by SAACR_FileGenerator Tab
(Section 3.1) to remove references to COM ports that are used by other equipment / sensors. If you
require assistance with this, please contact Measurand (Appendix K).
J.14 Setting Azimuth:
The X-mark at the top of the SAA is pointed in a certain direction. How should I set azimuth for
converting data?
To determine Azimuth, go to Appendix I.
J.15 Using Data From Damaged SAAs:
We believe one of more of our SAA segments have become damaged, however we would still like
to view as much of the SAA data as we can. What should we do?
If one or more SAA segments are damaged and not giving reliable data, it is still often possible to view
data for the rest of the SAA by “slaving” the damaged segments(s) in SAACR_FileGenerator Tab,
Sensor Fields (Section 3.2.6.6) and / or SAACR_raw2data Settings (Section 5.5.3).
Slaving a segment is the equivalent to telling the converter application to ignore any changes in tilt
that might result from that segment. If previous conversions have been performed without segments
slaved, it will be necessary to reconvert all the data by clicking the ‘RESET’ button when starting
SAACR_raw2data.
J.16 Checking Magnetometers:
How do I check my magnetometers to ensure they are working properly?
Note the information provided in this section only applies to SAAs for which optional
magnetometers were ordered.
J.16.1 Checking magnetometer data collected with SAARecorder
If you are using SAARecorder (Section 6) to collect data, you can view magnetometer data for all of
your magnetometer devices by clicking on the 'Data and graphs | Magnetometer data' menu item
(Section 6.5.6). This presents a window that allows you to quickly view heading information and total
magnetic field magnitude for each magnetometer.
If the devices are functioning correctly and the SAA is not moving, and is either vertical or within 45
degrees of vertical, the X-axis heading values should remain relatively fixed (within +/- 1 degree) and
should also agree fairly well (within +/- 5 degrees) with one another, assuming that the twist along
the length of the SAA is not excessive.
In the absence of any magnetic interference, the magnetic field strength measured by each device
should agree with the other devices to within +/- 5%.
272
December 2014
SAA Software
J.16.2 Checking magnetometer data collected using SAACR_raw2data
If you are converting data logger data using SAACR_raw2data (Section 5), you will need to:
1. In the ‘Settings’ window of SAACR_raw2data, click the ‘Advanced (mag)’ button (Section
5.7.2).
2. Click ‘Continue’.
3. Choose or create a file to which magnetometer data will be saved, ex: magdata.mat.
4. Open the same file you just saved.
5. Click the ‘Specific Settings’ button.
6. Should see an ‘Azimuth vs. Time’ graph with a single trace of ‘Change in Azimuth’ for each
magnetometer.
7. If the SAA is stable (i.e. not being rotated or moved at all, and none of the magnetometers
are affected by magnetic interference) then the change in azimuth plots for each
magnetometer should remain quite close to 0 degrees.
 Significant changes from 0 degrees (i.e. more than +/- 1 degrees) would indicate that
either (i) the SAA was rotated or (ii) there was some magnetic interference acting
upon the magnetometer(s).
8. Check the total magnitude of the magnetic field measured by each magnetometer by clicking
on the ‘tot’ button in the top-right corner and looking at the magnitude traces.
 The value of these traces is calibrated to be 1.0 for the Earth's magnetic field as
measured at our factory located in Fredericton, NB, Canada, but will in general be
slightly different depending on the strength of the Earth's field at your location.
 For example, in many parts of South America, the average strength of the Earth's
magnetic field is only about half that of the magnetic field strength in Eastern Canada.
 If the total magnitude measured by one or more magnetometers differs from that of
the other magnetometer(s) by more than 10% then it is likely that there is some
magnetic interference near the SAA that is adversely affecting one or more of the SAA
magnetometers.
 It is generally advisable to "turn off" any magnetometers that are affected by
magnetic interference by right-clicking on their corresponding magnitude trace and
then selecting the ‘Turn Off this mag’ option.
9. After the on / off states of the magnetometer devices and a "quiet time" in the magnetometer
data have been selected (as described in Section 5.7) the user saves the “Magnetometer” file
typically in a subfolder of the main data folder called "magdata".
 Within this folder is a generated file called "headings.txt" which contains a summary
of the heading azimuth angles measured by each magnetometer.
 These headings are useful for gauging exactly how much the SAA might be twisting.
J.17 Checking Data Logger Data:
How do I check data collected using a data logger to make sure it is good?
Use the SAACR_DataChecker utility in SAASuite to verify the raw data files collected using a data
logger are good. SAACR_DataChecker provides colour coded graphs of the SAA ‘data vs. time’.
Instructions for using the SAACR_DataChecker can be found in (Appendix B).
J.18 SAAView Showing One Frame:
I just saved 3 samples of data. Why does SAAView only show one frame?
December 2014
273
SAAView has a default filter which will average several readings together and present these in the
‘Filtered View’ presented at the right hand side of the ‘Main SAAView’ window. In order to view all
data, either change the filter using the methods described in Section 7.2.4, or make sure that you are
looking at the data in the ‘Unfiltered View’ located at the left of the ‘Main SAAView’ window.
J.19 Ignoring Segments:
How do I turn off or ignore segments?
In some cases the SAA in not fully installed into a borehole. In these cases, it is possible to turn off
segments and ignore them in the data viewer or in SAA_raw2data, see Section 5.5.3.
274
December 2014
SAA Software
K. Support (Help)
For support with SAAs, SAARecorder, or other Measurand products, please contact us:
Measurand Inc.
2111 Hanwell Road
Fredericton, New Brunswick
Canada E3C 1M7
Phone: 506-462-9119
Fax: 506-462-9095
Website: www.measurand.com
Email: [email protected]
K.1 Online Documents
The following link goes to Measurand’s website where Hardware and Software Manuals as well as
Product Specifications can be downloaded.
http://www.measurandgeotechnical.com/support_documents.html
K.2 Online Tutorial Videos
The following link goes to Measurand’s website where training videos for software and hardware use
and installation are available.
http://www.measurandgeotechnical.com/support_tutorial_videos.html
K.3 Online Software Downloads
The following link goes to Measurand’s website where SAASuite and other applications / utilities can
be downloaded.
http://www.measurandgeotechnical.com/software.html
December 2014
275